ICC 200
ICC 300 H-E
ICC 350
09.2004
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Service manual
ERBE
ICC 200, ICC 300 H-E, ICC 350
SERVICE
MANUAL
10128-002, 10128-009, 10128-010, 10128-015, 10128-016
10128-023, 10128-025, 10128-027, 10128-028, 10128-036
10128-051, 10128-054, 10128-055, 10128-056, 10128-058
10128-061, 10128-064, 10128-065, 10128-066, 10128-070
10128-071, 10128-072, 10128-073, 10128-074, 10128-075
10128-076, 10128-077, 10128-078, 10128-080, 10128-081
10128-082, 10128-083, 10128-200, 10128-202, 10128-204
10128-205, 10128-206, 10128-213, 10128-214, 10128-300
10128-301, 10128-303, 10128-304, 10128-305, 10128-306
10128-307,10128-310, 10128-403
09.2004
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Contents
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Chapter
Title
Page
0
Table of contents ................................................................................... 5
1
Test programs and adjustments .......................................................... 7
Calling up Test program mode ....................................................................... 10
Basic settings of the SETUP parameters ........................................................ 11
Front panel of the ICC 200 (INT) after starting up the unit ......................... 12
Front panel of the ICC 200 (UL) after starting up the unit .......................... 13
Front panel of the ICC 300 after starting up the unit ................................... 15
Front panel of the ICC 350 after starting up the unit ................................... 16
Test programs 1–8 ........................................................................................... 17
Test program 9 (Display programs 1–12) ..................................................... 28
Test programs 10–15 ....................................................................................... 39
Test program 16 (Adjustments, measuring equipment, jumper) ................. 45
Adjustment of ZMK Neurotest and TUR Neurotest ................................... 105
Adjustment of remote control for Neurotest ............................................... 111
Adjustment of activation and instrument detection .................................... 115
Test program 17, 23 ....................................................................................... 123
2
ERROR list ......................................................................................... 127
3
Circuit description ............................................................................. 137
4
Block diagrams .................................................................................. 169
5
Circuit diagrams ................................................................................. 175
A
Appendix A (Part numbers, PCB arrangement) .............................. 241
B
Appendix B (Abbreviations, notes, addresses) .............................. 263
5 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 1
Test programs
and
adjustments
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Test programs
ERBOTOM ICC 350, 300, 200
Version 4.0 / 3.0 / 2.0
No. Test program function
V 4.0 / 3.0 / V 2.0
1 Basic front panel setting (only ICC 300 and 200)
x
2 Calls up the Error list
x
3 Test of all D-flipflop circuit memories
x
4 Test of all front panel visual signals
x
5 Test of all acoustic signals
x
6 Test of all relays
x
7 NESSY: Version number setting
x
8 Display of software version no. and option no.
x
9 Activation of display programs
x
10 Time limit setup
11
Measurement and display of extra-low voltages +15 volts, –15 volts,
+24 volts and the temperature
12 Setting the FORCED voltage (2.0: 3 x forced; 4.0: 4 x forced)
x
x
x
13 not assigned
14 not assigned
15 not assigned
16 Test and setting help for all unit calibration functions
x
17 Brightness setting for the seven-segment displays
x
18 not assigned
19 not assigned
20 not assigned
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
21 not assigned
22 not assigned
23 AUTO START start delay setup
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
x
9 / 266
Calling up the
TEST PROGRAM mode
, , ,,
,
,
,, , ,, ,
,
,
, , ,, ,
1
2
3 4
5
7
8
9
11 12
14 15 16
Note regarding the drawing
The front panel shown of the ICC 350 applies to the ICC 200 and ICC 300 in such a way that only the
AUTO CUT and AUTO COAG control panels apply to the ICC 300, and the AUTO CUT, AUTO COAG
and AUTO BIPOLAR control panels apply to the ICC 300.
Calling up
Press key 3 (Roll) when switching on the power and hold it down.
Setting the test program number
Using keys 8 (Up) or 9 (Down), set the required program number.
Starting and finishing test programs
By pressing key 3 (Roll), start or finish a test program.
Exiting the test program mode
Exit the TEST PROGRAM MODE by switching off the power or setting TEST PROGRAM no. 0 using key 9
(Down).
10 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Basic settings of the SETUP
parameters
ERBOTOM ICC 350, 300 and 200
AUTO START delay
ICC 350, ICC 300
AUTO START delay
ICC 200
Autostart stage
Basic settings
Remarks
0
0s
adjustable using
Test program 23
1
0.5 s
2
1s
no stepping
0.5 s
output
max. time limit
Auto Cut
90 s
Auto Coag 1
90 s
Auto Coag 2
90 s
Auto Bipolar
90 s
NE 1
| || *)
Time limit setting
ICC 350
NESSY version no.
FORCED voltage version
Brightness of the
seven-segment display
*)
Test program 10
adjustable using
Test program 7
1
adjustable using
Test program 12
10
adjustable using
Test program 17
|| means a split NE electrode,
| means a non-split NE electrode,
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
| || means both split and non-split NE electrode are possible.
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
11 / 266
Front panel of the ICC 200 (INT)
After starting up the unit
Factory setting
B asic setting IC C 200 w ithout
EN D O C U T option
AUTO C UT
Effe ct 3
120 watts max.
AUTO C OAG
FORC ED
60 watts max.
AUTO C OAG (with ARGON option)
Spray
60 watts max.
Footswitch se tting
ye llow = AUTO C UT
blue = AUTO C OAG
AUTO C UT
Effe ct 3
120 watts max.
AUTO C OAG
FORC ED
60 watts max.
AUTO C OAG (with ARGON option)
Spray
60 watts max.
Footswitch se tting
ye llow = AUTO C UT
blue = AUTO C OAG
END O C UT
ON
Basic setting ICC 200 with
ENDO CUT option
12
/ 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Pulse le ngth
tON = 50 ms
Pause le ngth
tOFF = 750 ms
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Front panel of the ICC 200 (UL)
After starting up the unit
Factory programming
Basic programming
ICC 200 without ENDO CUT option
Effe ct 3
120 watts max.
AUTO C OAG
FORC ED
60 watts max.
Footswitch se tting
ye llow = AUTO C UT
blue = AUTO C OAG
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
AUTO C UT
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
13 / 266
NOTE
If the settings are reset, the factory programming of the ICC 200 E and ICC 200 E/A units is lost.
It can be restored using the following table.
Basic programming
ICC 200 E and ICC 200 E/A
AUTO C UT
Effe ct 3
200 watts max.
AUTO C OAG
FORC ED
25 watts max.
AUTO C OAG
SOFT
65 watts max.
AUTO C OAG
BIPOLAR
20 watts max.
AUTO C OAG (for IC C 200 E/A only)
Spray
60 watts max.
Footswitch se tting
ye llow = AUTO C UT
blue = AUTO C OAG
END O C UT
ON
14
/ 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Pulse le ngth
tON = 50 ms
Pause le ngth
tOFF = 750 ms
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Front panel of the ICC 300
After starting up the unit
Factory setting
Basic setting ICC 300
Effect 3
150 watts max.
AUTO COAG
SOFT
60 watts max.
AUTO BIPOLAR
AUTO START = off
60 watts max.
Footswitch setting
yellow = AUTO CUT
blue = AUTO COAG
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
AUTO CUT
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
15 / 266
Front panel of the ICC 350
After starting up the unit
Factory setting
Basic setting ICC 350
AUTO CUT
Effect 3
150 watts max.
HIGH CUT
switched off
–
AUTO COAG 1
SOFT
60 watts max.
AUTO COAG 2
FORCED
60 watts max.
AUTO BIPOLAR
AUTO START = off
AUTO STOP = off
40 watts max.
Footswitch setting
yellow = AUTO CUT
blue = AUTO COAG 2
16 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Test program no. 1
ICC 200, 300 only
General description
Using this test program, any front panel setting can be made. This setting is known as the basic setting.
After termination, the basic setting is stored internally. Only completely saved channels are stored. The
basic setting display flashes. Acknowledge by pressing any key.
Termination
Using “Power off”.
Switch off a channel
Using the “Down” key (8), set the lowest intensity. Once the lowest display is set, the seven-segment
display changes to “---”. This means that the channel has been switched off.
Basic setting and brief power failure
For a brief power failure of 15 seconds max., the front panel setting last set is displayed.
Activation of a channel is blocked if a channel has not been completely set or the basic setting was not
acknowledged.
The basic setting set at the factory corresponds to the FIXE basic setting.
FIXE basic setting
A FIXE basic setting is stored in the program. This basic setting is accepted and displayed if:
the stored front panel setting is invalid, e.g. through failure of the circuit memory or through battery
memory lost,
•
in Test program 1, the “All off” setting has been accepted.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
•
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
17 / 266
Test program no. 2
Call up and display of the error memory
General description
The ICC units are equipped with a system for error detection, error indication and error memory. Every error
receives an error number (ERROR no.). The unit stores the last 10 ERROR numbers. Test program 2 displays
the stored ERROR numbers. The most recent error occurring chronologically is in memory location 1.
Display
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
Err.
1 ... 10
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
xxx
xxx: Display of the error number
By pressing keys 8 (Up) or 9 (Down), you can call up the memory locations one after another. By pressing
key 7, you delete the error numbers at all memory locations.
Example
After starting the test program with key 3, for example, Error no. 2 appears at memory location 1 with the
following display:
Display
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
Err.
1
18 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
2
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Test program no. 3
Test of all D-flipflop circuit memories
General description
Test of all D-flipflop (D-FF) circuit memories. After starting the test with key 3, you will see the following display:
Display
(ICC 350, ICC 300)
AUTO CUT
buS
*)
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
0
AUTO BIPOLAR
d0 ... d7 alternating
Display
(ICC 200)
buS
d0 ... d7 alternating
buS*) (D-FF-Test Nr. 0) tests the external control bus for signal lines d0–d7. The signal lines d0–d7 are
switched on and off one after another. The switching statuses can be displayed on the bar graph (adapter
board 30183-102).
Using the keys 8 (Up) or 9 (Down), you can call up D-FF tests 1-11. You will see the following display:
Display
(ICC 350, ICC 300)
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
dFF
1 ... 11
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
d0 ... d7 alternating
Display
(ICC 200)
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
dFF 1 ... 9
d0 ... d7 alternating
The D-FF signal lines d0-d7 are switched on and off one after another. The signals can be measured at the
D-FF outputs. There is an error if
•
there is more than one output status at the same time,
•
there is constantly an output signal in spite of switching over,
•
there is no output signal in spite of D-FF activation.
*)
1
buS is the seven-segment display for the word „BUS“.
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19 / 266
Test program no. 3
Test of all D-flipflop circuit memories
Overview of the D-flipflop tests
Test no. D-FF description
Position
Remarks
0 external control bus
Motherboard
1 D-FF IC 2
Motherboard
2 D-FF IC 3
Motherboard
3 D-FF IC 9
Extra-low voltage and tone
4 D-FF IC 19
Control board
5 D-FF IC 20
Control board
6 D-FF IC 6
ST power stage
7 D-FF IC 10
Senso-board
8 D-FF IC 8
Relay board
not ICC 200
9
Extension motherboard slot J9
not ICC 200
10
Extension motherboard slot J9
not ICC 200
11
Extension motherboard slot J9
not ICC 200
20 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Test program no. 4
Check of the optical signals on the front
panel
General description
Using this program, you can test the optical displays on the front panel. After starting the test program, you
will see the following display:
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
All optical signals on the front panel are switched on. The 7-segment displays show “8.” for all numbers.
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
21 / 266
Test program no. 5
Sound control for all available sounds
General description
Using this program, you can test and set all available sounds. After starting the program, you will see the
following display:
Display
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
ton
0 ... 4
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
Using the keys 8 (Up) or 9 (Down), you can set a test number from 0 to 4. The following correspondence
applies between the test numbers and the sounds:
Test no. Tones switched on
0
Tone variants
Remarks
Tone generation
switched off
1 Basic tone 1
Volume adjustable
2 Basic tone 2
Volume adjustable
3 Basic tone 3
Volume adjustable
4 Basic tone 4
Volume adjustable
22 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Basic tone 1 to 3
Volume adjustable
Mixed tone: Basic tone 1 and 2
Volume adjustable
Mixed tone: Basic tone 1 and 3
Volume adjustable
Mixed tone: Basic tone 2 and 3
Volume adjustable
Basic tone 1 to 3
Alarm volume
Mixed tone: Basic tone 1 and 2
Alarm volume
Mixed tone: Basic tone 1 and 3
Alarm volume
Mixed tone: Basic tone 2 and 3
Alarm volume
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Test program no. 5
Sound control for all available sounds
Frequency adjustment for warning tones
The warning tone frequency setting can be adjusted independently of other assemblies on the low-voltage
power supply (jumper J2) with Test program no. 5.
Activate Test program no. 5. MP 4 is GND for frequency counter.
•
Call »Tone 1«: Set frequency at MP 1 with TP 2 to 493 Hz (±2 Hz) with frequency counter.
•
Call »Tone 2«: Set frequency at MP 2 with TP 3 to 414 Hz (±2 Hz) with frequency counter.
•
Call »Tone 3«: Set frequency at MP 3 with TP 4 to 329 Hz (±2 Hz) with frequency counter.
•
To check settings the various tones and mixed tones are generated one after the other by calling
»Tone 4«. Here, take especial care that the operating and warning tones have different volumes.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
•
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
23 / 266
Test program no. 6
Relay test
General description
Using this program, all relays can be actuated. The NESSY measurement monitor is switched off. After
ending the test program, relay no. 1 is switched on for the power starting current limitation.
Test program no. 6 is also intended for safety testing of the unit. With this test, there may be a brief
failure of the power supply due to the external intervention. If the test program is activated, the test
program is automatically called up again after a brief power failure of up to approx. 15 seconds. However,
if the power failure is longer than 15 seconds, this will not occur.
After starting the test program, you will see the following display:
Display
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
rEL
0 ... 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
Designation of the PCBs with their assigned relays
PCB
Slot
Relay function
Remarks
Motherboard ICC 350
–
see lines 3 and 4
Motherboard ICC 200
–
see lines 3 and 4
Motherboard
–
Rel. 1: Power starting current limitation
Motherboard
–
Rel. 2: Capacitance ground
Power module
J5
Rel. 1: Switchover ST generator: HF
ST power stage
J6
Rel. 1: Output HF: UE1 to NE
ST power stage
J6
Rel. 2: Output HF: Rel. 3 to AE
ST power stage
J6
Rel. 3: Output HF: UE1 to AE
ST power stage
J6
Rel. 19: Connection to power supply
Senso-board
J7
Rel. 1: Output NE - NESSY
Senso-board
J7
Rel. 2: Output AE
Senso-board
J7
Rel. 3: Output NE
Relay board
J8
Rel. 1: Output AE 1
only ICC 300 / 350
Relay board
J8
Rel. 2: Output AE 2
only ICC 300 / 350
ICC 200: Mono output
board
J8
Rel. 1: Output AE 1
only ICC 200
24 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
only for ICC 350
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Test program no. 6
Relay test
Overview of the relay test options
Test no. 0
Switch off all relays
Test object
Relay status
Rel. 1, motherboard
switched off
all other relays
switched off
Remarks
Power starting
current limitation
Test no. 1
Switch on all relays
Test object
Relay status
Rel. 1, motherboard
switched on
Rel. 2, motherboard
depending on
dongle installed
capacitance
grounded
(only ICC 350)
all other relays
switched on
Remarks
Power starting
current limitation
switched on
or off
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
All relays on PCBs additionally required for the ERBOTOM ICC 350 MIC are switched on.
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
25 / 266
Test program no. 7
Setting the NESSY version
General description
Using this program, you can set four NESSY versions. After starting the test program, you will see the
following displays when you activate key 3:
Display
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
NE.1
|| or |
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
In the AUTO COAG field:
||
means a split neutral electrode,
|
means of non-split neutral electrode.
Using the keys 8 (Up) or 9 (Down), you can set four different NESSY versions:
No.
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
Remarks
1
NE.1
|| or |
for split and non-split electrodes
2
NE.2
|
only for non-split electrodes
3
NE.3
||
only for split electrodes; acoustic (3 times) and
visual alarm
4
NE.4
||
only for split electrodes; acoustic (continuous
tone) and visual alarm
At the end of the test, the NESSY version number is stored. Version number 1 is the standard version set
when the unit is delivered. In case of memory failure, version no. 1 is automatically set. When switching on
the power, version no. 2, 3 or 4 is displayed briefly if this is set. The standard version no. 1 is not displayed.
26 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Test program no. 8
Display of the software version and any
options
General description
Using this program, you can display the software version, while on the ICC 350 and ICC 300, you can also
see the display of an option identification number.
After starting the program, you will see the following display:
Display
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
Snr
x.xx
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
y
Explanation:
x.xx Software version no. (e.g. 2.0)
y
Option code no. (e.g. 8).
Code
no. means
0 Unit without option
1 ICC 350: Neurotest ZMK
2 ICC 350: Neurotest TUR
4
8 ICC 350: ENDO CUT function
16
32
64
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
128
256
The code number is based on a binary code:
Example
Code no. 2 means
ICC 350 Neurotest TUR
Code no. 9 means
ICC 350 Neurotest ZMK
+
Endocut
1
+
8
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
27 / 266
Test program no. 9
Activating display programs to display
measurement values
General description
This program activates displays in the standby mode or during activation. With key 3, Test program no. 9 is
started.
After starting, you will see the following display:
Display
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
nr.
0
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
Within Test program no. 9, 22 subprograms for displaying specific data can be called up, while subprograms
16 to 22 are intended only for use by the manufacturer.
These subprograms can now be set using keys 8 (Up) or 9 (Down). Once the required display program has
been selected, it is reactivated using key 3. The selected display program remains activated until the power
is switched off.
Display
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
nr.
0 ... 22
28 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
AUTO COAG 2
1
AUTO BIPOLAR
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Display programs nos. 1–3
The selected display program now displays the required data during regular operation of the unit. To do
this, the appropriate operating modes must be set and the accessories activated.
The display program remains activated until the power is switched off. To return to normal operation, the
unit must be switched off for a short time and switched back on again.
Display program no. 1: not assigned
Display program no. 2: not assigned
Display program no. 3:
ST generator time control with activation of SPRAY or FORCED.
Display for ICC 350 and ICC 300:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
ttt
P2
P3
tst
ttt
Difference between set frequency and actual frequency
P2
Set power [W]
P3
Set power [W]
tst
Abbreviation of the test title (Time-ST stage)
Display program no. 3:
ST generator time control with activation of FORCED.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Display on ICC 200:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
ttt
tst
ttt
Difference between set frequency and actual frequency
tst
Abbreviation of the test title (Time-ST stage)
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
29 / 266
Display programs nos. 4–5
Display program no. 4:
ST generator measurement values with ST generator activation.
Output measurement values U st, Ist
Display for ICC 350 and ICC 300:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
uuu
iii
P3
UI
uuu
Measurement value of the output voltage sensor
iii
Measurement value of the output current sensor
P3
Set power [W]
UI
Abbreviation of the test title (Voltage and current measurement)
Display program no. 4:
ST generator measurement values with ST generator activation.
FORCED activation
Display for ICC 200:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
uuu
USt
uuu
Measurement value of the output voltage sensor
Display program no. 5:
Power supply unit measurement values for ST generator activation.
Measurement values Unt, Int
Display for ICC 350 and ICC 300:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
uuu
iii
P3
UI
uuu
Measurement value of the power supply unit voltage
iii
Measurement value of the power supply unit current
P3
Set power
UI
Abbreviation of the test title (Voltage, current measurement)
30 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Display program nos. 5–7
Display program no. 5:
Power supply measurement values with ST generator activation, FORCED activation.
Measurement values Unt, Int
Display for ICC 200:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
uuu
Unt
uuu
Measurement value of the power supply unit voltage
Display program no. 6:
ST generator measurement values for ST generator activation, FORCED activation.
Measurement value Ist
Display for ICC 200:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
iii
Ist
iii
Measurement value of the output current sensor
Display program no. 7:
Power supply unit measurement values for ST generator activation, FORCED activation.
Measurement value Int
Display for ICC 200:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
iii
Int
Measurement value of the power supply unit current
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
iii
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
31 / 266
Display program no. 8
Display program no. 8:
Measurement values for activation of the sine-wave generator.
AUTO CUT, AUTO COAG 1 and 2 in SOFT mode, AUTO BIPOLAR
Output measurement value U act
Display for ICC 350 and ICC 300:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
ppp
uuu
cos
PU
ppp
HF power output [W], present power output
uuu
HF output voltage [V], present output voltage
cos
PU
cos-j-value from the table (ICC 350 only)
Abbreviation of the test title (Power and voltage measurement)
Display program no. 8:
Measurement values for activation of the sine-wave generator.
AUTO CUT, AUTO COAG 1 and 2 in SOFT mode, AUTO BIPOLAR
Output measurement value Uact
Display for ICC 200:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
ppp
P
ppp
P
HF power output [W]
Abbreviation of the test title (Power measurement)
32 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Display program no. 9
Display program no. 9:
Measurement values for activation of the sine-wave generator.
AUTO CUT, AUTO COAG 1 and 2 in SOFT mode, AUTO BIPOLAR
Output measurement values I real, cos j (Real part of the current and cos j between voltage and current)
Display for ICC 350 and ICC 300:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
iii
cos
ppp
IC
iii
Real part of the measurement value from the HF output current
cos
ppp
cos-j value from the table (ICC 350 only)
HF power output [W] for ICC 350
IC
Abbreviation of the test title (Current measurement and cos j measurement)
Display program no. 9:
Measurement values for activation of the sine-wave generator.
AUTO CUT, AUTO COAG 1 and 2 in SOFT mode, AUTO BIPOLAR
Output measurement value: Measurement value of the real part of the HF output current
Display for the ICC 200:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
iii
I
Measurement value of the real part of the HF output current
I
Abbreviation of the test title (Current measurement)
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
iii
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
33 / 266
Display programs nos. 10–11
Display program no. 10:
Measurement values for activation of the sine-wave generator.
AUTO CUT, AUTO COAG 1 and 2 in SOFT mode, AUTO BIPOLAR
Output measurement value U act
Display for the ICC 200:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
uuu
U
uuu
HF output voltage [V]
U
Abbreviation of the test title (Voltage measurement)
Display program no. 11:
Measurement values for activation of the sine-wave generator.
AUTO CUT, AUTO COAG 1 and 2 in SOFT mode, AUTO BIPOLAR
Output measurement value cos j
Display for the ICC 200:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
cos
Cos
cos
cos-j value from the table
Cos
Abbreviation of the test title (cos-j measurement)
34 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Display program no. 12 (Start)
Display program no. 12:
Contact resistance at AUTO START, in standby operation.
Only valid for AUTO START 0, 1, 2 and in standby operation.
Display for ICC 350 and ICC 300:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
uuu
P2
P3
br
uuu
Measurement value of the contact monitor voltage measurement
P2
Set power for AUTO COAG 1 [W]
P3
Set power for AUTO COAG 2 [W]
br
Contact monitor
Display program no. 12:
Contact resistance for AUTO START, in active condition.
Only valid for AUTO START 0, 1, 2 and in active condition.
Display for ICC 350 and ICC 300:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
rda
P2
P3
br
Calculated value of the contact resistance [ohms]
P2
Set power for AUTO COAG 1 [W]
P3
Set power for AUTO COAG 2 [W]
br
Contact monitor
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
rda
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
35 / 266
Display program no. 12 (continued)
Display program no. 12:
Contact resistance for AUTO START, in standby operation.
Display for ICC 200:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
uuu
br
uuu
Measurement value of the contact monitor voltage measurement
br
Contact monitor
Display program no. 12:
Contact resistance for AUTO START, in active condition.
Display for ICC 200:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
rda
br
rda
Calculated value of the contact resistance [ohms]
br
Contact monitor
36 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Display program no. 15
Display program no. 15:
NESSY transition resistance in stand-by-operation and on activation.
Display for ICC 350 and ICC 300:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
rtr
P2
P3
br
rtr
calculated NESSY transition resistance [Ohm]
P2
set power for AUTO COAG 1 [W]
P3
set power for AUTO COAG 2 [W]
br
AUTO START monitor
Display program no. 15:
NESSY transition resistance in stand-by-operation and on activation.
Display for ICC 200:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
rtr
r
calculated NESSY transition resistance [Ohm]
r
AUTO START monitor
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
rtr
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
37 / 266
Display programs nos. 13–22
NOTE
Display programs nos. 13 and 14 are not assigned. The program nos. 17–22 are only intended for internal
use by the manufacturer.
38 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Test program no. 10
Changing the maximum time limit
General description
Using this program, you can change the time limit for the ICC 200, 300 and 350. The setting range varies
from 3 to 960 seconds.
Using the appropriate “Up” or “Down” keys, the time limit restriction for every current quality can be set
individually.
For the ICC 350, various time limit settings can be stored in the individual program memories for each user.
This occurs after selecting the program number with program memory key 2 and then changing the respective
current qualities using the appropriate “Up” or “Down” key.
After termination of Test program 10 using key 3, the settings made are stored.
In case of memory failure, as well as in the delivery condition, the max. time limit for all programs and
current qualities (CUT, COAG 1, COAG 2, BIPOLAR) is set at 90 seconds.
After starting Test program 10 with key 3, you will see the following display:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
t1
t2
t3
t4
• t1: Time limit restriction for AUTO CUT in seconds
• t2: Time limit restriction for AUTO COAG 1 in seconds
• t3: Time limit restriction for AUTO COAG 2 in seconds
• t4: Time limit restriction for AUTO BIPOPLAR in seconds.
Using the following keys, you can adjust the max. time limit (see page 1-4):
:
Keys 4 and 5
• AUTO COAG 1 :
Keys 8 and 9
• AUTO COAG 2 :
Keys 11 and 12
• AUTO BIPOLAR :
Keys 15 and 16
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
• AUTO CUT
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
39 / 266
Test program no. 11
Measurement value output for the
measurement channels
Using this program, you can measure the internal supply voltages and the temperature of the unit. In addition,
you can display all analog direct measurement channels 1, 2, 3 and 4 as well as analog multiplex measurement
channels.
After starting the test program, you will see the following display:
Display ICC 350 / 300
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
U
0
XX.X
U–
1
XX.X
U
2
XX.X
tPt
ttt
xxx
Ch
4 … 22
yyy
• XX.X
Voltage value [V]
• ttt
Temperature [°C]
• xxx
ADC measurement value in the range 0 … 255
• yyy
ADC measurement value in the range 0 … 255
AUTO BIPOLAR
Using the keys “Up” (8) or “Down” (9), call up the subprograms U, U-, tPt and Ch 4 … 22.
U0
is the low voltage controlled to +15 volts ±10%
U–1
is the low voltage controlled to –15 volts ±10%
U2
is the low voltage controlled to 24 volts ±10%
tPt
is the temperature display of the output stage ±15%
Ch4 … 22 are the analog measurement channels according to the following table:
Display ICC 200
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
U.15
XX.X
–15
XX.X
U.24
XX.X
tPt
ttt
C.aa
yyy
40 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
AUTO COAG 2
1
AUTO BIPOLAR
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Test program no. 11
Measurement value output of the
measurement channels
• XX.X
Voltage rating [ V ]
• ttt
Temperature [°C ]
• C.aa
Channel number
• yyy
ADC measurement value in the range 0 ... 255
Using the “Up” (8) or “Down” (9) keys, call up the subprograms U, U-, tPt und C. 4-22.
U0
is the supply voltage controlled to +15 volts
U–1
is the supply voltage controlled to –15 volts
U2
is the supply voltage controlled to +24 volts
tPt
is the temperature display of the output stage
C. 4 … 22 are the analog measurement channels according to the following table.
Voltage test U 0 or U.15
Measurement and display of the supply voltage controlled to +15 volts
Display XX.X: e.g. 14.6 equals 14.6 volts
Voltage test U–1 or –15
Measurement and display of the supply voltage controlled to –15 volts
Display XX.X: e.g. 14.6 equals –14.6 volts
Voltage test U 2 or U.24
Measurement and display of the supply voltage controlled to +24 volts
Display XX.X: e.g. 23.6 equals +23.6 volts
Measurement of the output stage temperature
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Display tPt 25 means that the temperature inside the unit is 25 °C.
Test of the analog measurement channels (Subtest 4 … 22)
Measurement and display of 19 analog measurement channels inside the unit.
(Intended for internal use by the manufacturer only).
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
41 / 266
Test program no. 12
Setting the FORCED voltage
General description
When this program is called up, the set FORCED version is displayed. Using the “Up” (8) or “Down” (9)
keys, you can set one of three (V2.0) or four (V4.0) FORCED versions.
With FORCED coagulation, the ST pulse generator produces short pulses with a high no-load voltage. The
high no-load voltage has both advantages and disadvantages which are described in this section with the
features.
Using Test program 12, the no-load voltage can be changed relative to the set power limitation.
After starting the test program, you will see the following display:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
For.
vs nr
AUTO COAG 2
For.
Voltage limitation for FORCED coagulation
vs nr:
FORCED version nos. 1…3 (V2.0) or 1…4 (V4.0)
AUTO BIPOLAR
Call up the version number using the “Up” (8) or “Down” (9) keys.
Forced version vs nr 1
A power limitation of 1 to 30 watts increases the no-load voltage constantly up to approx. 1,300 Vp.
Above 30 watts power limitation, the no-load voltage is limited to approx. 1,300 Vp.
Characteristics of the version vs nr 1
•
Minimal image interference on monitors.
•
Danger of burns from contact with a terminal.
•
Good coagulation via a terminal without heavy spark formation.
•
No heavy spark formation even at a high power setting.
•
To direct power into the tissue, the tissue must be contacted (No power transmission via spark).
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
FORCED version vs nr 2
A power limitation of 1 to 30 watts increases the no-load voltage constantly up to approx. 1,300 Vp. Above
30 watts power limitation, the no-load voltage continues to increase:
No-load voltage at 40 watts: approx. 1,500 Vp
No-load voltage at 50 watts: approx. 1,700 Vp
No-load voltage at 60 watts: approx. 1,900 Vp
No-load voltage from 80 to 120 watts: approx. 2,300 Vp.
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
43 / 266
Test program no. 12
Setting the FORCED voltage
Characteristics of version vs nr 2
The characteristics are between those of the vs nr 1 and those of the vs nr 3.
FORCED voltage version vs nr 3
A power limitation of 1 to 30 watts increases the no-load voltage constantly up to approx. 2,300 V p. Above
30 watts power limitation, the no-load voltage is limited to approx. 2,300 Vp.
Characteristics of version vs nr 3
•
Image interferences on monitors possible.
•
Danger of burns from contact with a terminal possible.
•
Heavy spark formation with coagulation via a terminal.
•
Heavy spark formation also at a 30 watts power setting.
To direct high-frequency power into the tissue, the tissue must not necessarily be contacted (current flow or
powered transmission [see vs nr 2] possible via arc).
FORCED voltage version vs nr 4
A power limitation of 1 to 30 watts increases the no-load voltage constantly up to approx. 2,600 Vp. Above
30 watts power limitation, the no-load voltage is limited to approx. 2,600 Vp.
Characteristics of version vs nr 4
•
Image interference on monitors possible.
•
Danger of burns from contact with a terminal possible.
•
Heavy spark formation with coagulation via a terminal.
•
Heavy spark formation also at a 30 watts power setting.
To direct high-frequency power into the tissue, the tissue must not necessarily be contacted (current flow or
powered transmission [see vs nr 2] possible via arc).
Important notes
•
The vs no set only applies to FORCED AUTO COAG 1, FORCED AUTO COAG 2 and for programs
0 to 11.
•
For the MIC program, vs nr 1 is automatically set.
•
In case of memory failure, vs nr 1 is automatically set.
When switching on the power supply, vs nr 2, vs nr 3 or vs nr 4 (V4.0) is briefly displayed. The standard vs
nr 1 is not displayed.
44 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Test program no. 16
Pre-information:
Recommended measuring equipment
Measuring equipment
To service equipment from the ICC series, various meters are necessary. The following list summarizes
recommended measuring equipment for a quick overview.
ATTENTION !
Individual parts and boards are at supply voltage potential. After removing the housing cover, there is risk of
electrical shock due to unintentional contact with the power plug connected.
The HF power meter, the oscilloscope and the frequency counter must be operated as floating.
The unit contains a lithium battery which must only be discarded in battery collection containers in completely
discharged condition (i.e. after use). Otherwise, care must be taken to prevent shorting in accordance with
the battery regulations.
EE order no.
(230 V; 50/60 Hz)
EE order no.
(120 V; 50/60 Hz)
Testbox 2
20183-040
20183-041
70 V testbox for spark monitor ICC
20100-019
20100-028
Measuring equipment
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
HF power meter
—
Isolating transformer for APM 600
20100-013
Adapter cable for NESSY monitor
20100-003
Bipolar adapter cable
20100-004
Measurement cable for LF patient leakage current
20100-009 (standard)
Measurement cable for LF patient leakage current
20100-012 (international)
2-channel oscilloscope (> 40 MHz)
—
Frequency counter
—
Multimeter with µA range
—
Bipolar testbox automatic starter ICC
20100-017
Extension board
30183-106
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
45 / 266
Test program no. 16
Pre-information:
Jumper on the display board
General information
On the display board, there are slots for jumper which, by plugging in so-called “jumpers”, can activate
special software by which our HF surgical units from the ICC series can be adapted to prescribed special
conditions (such as are necessary in various countries) or by means of which specific tests can be performed
by the testing department and service.
WARNING
These jumpers are already positioned during production and must never be changed randomly. For a software
update, make certain that the jumpers are correctly plugged in. Back-up plugs are in the bag with the spare
fuses.
Where are the slots for the jumpers?
If you look at the display board inside the open unit from the perspective of the rear panel, the following
stylized image can be seen:
J3–J6
6
3
Connector
to the CPU
LED display
LED display
LED display
LED display
J7–J10
7
10
J7–J10
7
10
Only at right on
ICC 300
Two blocks are available to receive jumpers: At the top right is a block with the slots J3–J6, at the bottom
left (ICC 300: bottom right) is the block with the slots J7–J10.
46 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Test program no. 16
Pre-information:
Jumper on the display board
Block 1
Jumper plugged in
Jumper not plugged in
Output circuitry with
capacitance ground.
Output circuitry is "floating
output".
Maximum temperature of
generator is displayed
(ERROR 11).
The unit is delivered with this
setting.
J5 J5 functions together with J6.
(see following explanation)
(see following explanation)
J6 J6 functions together with J5.
(see following explanation)
(see following explanation)
Pos. Function
Only ICC 350:
Switchover of neutral
J3
electrode to "capacitance
grounded" or "floating output".
J4
Only for test purposes.
Temperature display.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
The J5 and J6 slots are read by the CPU as a binary number. In this way four different functioning methods,
independent from one another, are programmable by plugging in these jumpers:
J5
J6
Description of the set function
free
free
None of the following 3 programs is selected.
plugged
free
Contact monitor is blocked and AUTO START display is "off".
free
plugged
During activation, another activation signal from some other source has switched off
the unit activation (Spanish regulation).
F leakage current > 150 mA, but < 300 mA:
Triple visual and acoustic alarm is triggered.
plugged plugged
HF leakage current > 300 mA:
The HF generator is switched off. Visual and acoustic alarm is triggered.
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
47 / 266
Test program no. 16
Pre-information:
Jumper on the display board
Block 2 (as of Version 1.06)
Pos. Function
Jumper plugged in
Jumper not plugged in
(not applicable)
(not applicable)
J7 (not in use)
Deactivation of ERROR 30
Low-resistance load operation possible for BIPOLAR COAG
(as of V 2.00):
< 5 ohms triggers ERROR 30
- after 4 s red LED (output
to protect accessories and
error)
J8 generator.
- Output current max. 1.5 A
ERROR 30 can be
- no ERROR indication
deactivated here when
(This specification especially
activating AUTO BIPOLAR.
applies to the USA.)
ERROR 30 warning appears
due to delivery status
(not USA, ERROR 30
deactivated here).
Regardless of the selection, special settings are necessary for specific countries. These can be found in the
following matrix. Explanation:
1
Jumper must be plugged in,
o
Jumper must not be plugged in,
x
(according to the description for Block 1).
Country
J5
J6
J7
J8
Germany
o
o
no function
per above table
European countries
(excepted:
see below)
o
o
no function
per above table
Great Britain
1
o
no function
per above table
Spain
o
1
no function
per above table
Japan
1
1
no function
per above table
USA
x
x
no function
1
48 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Test program no. 16
Pre-information:
Jumper on the display board
Note regarding ERROR 30
With bipolar coagulation, it may happen that, over a longer period of time, a short circuit occurs on one of
the bipolar forceps. Particularly for thin forceps, there is a danger with a short circuit that the forceps begin
to glow due to the high current and the HF generator is damaged due to a mismatch.
Since tissue resistance quickly reaches values above 50 ohms during a coagulation process with conventional
bipolar instruments, normally after starting the coagulation by desiccating the tissue, it is assumed that,
with a continuously low resistance of less than 50 ohms, an error status results which is indicated by
ERROR 30.
In addition, there are large-area coagulation forceps for which a resistance less than 50 ohms is set, insofar
as the legs are only open to a small degree. If the operating surgeon activates such an instrument with a
small leg opening, ERROR 30 is indicated after approx. 5 seconds and activation is switched off. This error
message is felt to be a nuisance by some operating surgeons. In these particular cases, the ERROR 30 error
message can be switched off on units above Version 2.00 by means of the jumper in position J8. In this case,
at a resistance less than 50 ohms, the output current of the ICC is limited to 1.5 A.
WARNING
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
For a power setting greater than 20 W, there is a danger of destroying the HF generator after approx. 1
minute during short-circuit operation. There is no warning if the ERROR 30 error message is switched off.
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
49 / 266
Test program no. 16
General description
General description
All adjustment work is performed solely with the help of this test program. Here the sequence from
Adjustment 1 to Adjustment 13 must be followed.
Ending the test is only possible at the setting Adjustment 0 (as of 0 in the display).
If Test program 16 is activated, the test program is automatically called up again if there is a brief power
failure lasting up to approx. 15 seconds. If the power failure lasts longer than 15 seconds, the test program
is no longer automatically called up.
This text describes only the function of the program. The unit is adjusted according to the adjustment
instructions. These adjustment instructions are a component of the service documents.
After starting the test program with key 3, you will see the following display:
Display ICC 350 / 300
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
Ab
xx (0 … 13)
xx
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
Adjustment test number (beginning with 0)
Display ICC 200
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
Ab
xx
xx
Adjustment test number (beginning with 0)
Adjustment 0 permits entry and exit from Test program 16.
50 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Test program no. 16
List of individual adjustments
Test program 16:
Adjustment
List of individual adjustments
Function of the adjustment
1
Phase relationship of the power supply unit
2
Current/voltage setting of the power supply unit
3
Setting of the actuation pulse length for the HF generator
4
Phase relationship of the HF generator
5
Current/voltage setting of the HF generator
6
Current/voltage setting of the amplified measurement values of the HF generator
7
Phase angle setting (cos Phi)
8
Adjustment of the function monitor sensor
9
NESSY adjustment: Contact resistance
10
HF leakage current monitor
11
Starting threshold of the contact monitor
12
Length of actuation pulse and frequency setting of the ST generator
13
LF leakage current measurement and setting help for CF
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Using the “Up” (8) and “Down” (9) keys, call up an adjustment test number. Start the adjustment test with
key 3.
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
51 / 266
Adjustment 1
Power supply unit phase relationship
Procedure
•
Unplug power cable from the ERBOTOM ICC.
•
Pull off the black lines on the bridge-connected rectifier BR 1 on the motherboard and connect an
adjustable isolating transformer to BR 1 in its place, the output voltage of which is adjusted to 0 V.
With well prebalanced boards, a transformer with a fixed voltage of approx. 155 V AC can also be
used.
ATTENTION !
For units which are set to 120 V, you must absolutely make certain that the Erbotom ICC is operated via an
isolated transformer. In addition, the connection between J15 and J20 on the motherboard must be removed
from J15.
•
Connect 200 ohms load resistance (e.g. APM 600) to MP1 = GND and MP2 on the power module
(slot J5).
•
Connect the oscilloscope to MP1 = GND and MP2 = probe on QC power stage end stage (slot J4).
•
Plug the power cable for the Erbotom ICC back in and activate Test program 16, Adjustment 1.
•
Activate using the yellow pedal on the footswitch (AUTO CUT).
•
Slowly increase the output voltage on the isolating transformer. With a correct setting, the voltage
characteristic corresponds to the graph illustrated below, whereby the small dip (approx. 20 V) next
to the square-wave edges represent a good criterion of evaluation for this.
•
Set the phase angle using TP13 (control board, slot J3). For the final setting, the square-wave voltage
must be increased to approx. ±100 V. (Display in AUTO CUT approx. 205).
•
After the setting is complete, disconnect the ERBOTOM ICC from the power, remove the cable from
the isolating transformer to BR1 and connect the two black lines again to the bridge-connected
rectifier.
Fig.: Voltage characteristic of supply unit power
T
1>
1) Ch 1:
50 Volt 500 ns
54 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment 1
Power supply unit phase relationship
ICC 350
ICC 300
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
Ab
nPh
before activation
U NTG
nPh
during activation
ICC 200
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
Ab
nPh
before activation
U NTG
nPh
after activation
• U NTG
Power supply unit voltage [V]
• nPh
Adjustment of the phase relationship for the power supply unit generator
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
55 / 266
Adjustment 2
Power supply unit output parameters
Procedure
•
Connect 500 ohms load resistance (APM 600) to MP1 = GND and MP2 = +U on “Power Module”
board (slot J5).
•
Plug in the power cable on the ICC.
•
Call up Test program 16, Adjustment 2.
•
Activate ERBOTOM ICC using the yellow footswitch pedal (AUTO CUT).
•
Set TP2 on the control board (slot J3) in such a way that 100 W (tolerance +0% / –7%) can be
measured at the HF power meter and a power supply current of 447 mA (tolerance 444...455 mA) is
displayed in the AUTO COAG 1 display. In the AUTO CUT display, a power supply voltage of 223
V (tolerance 223…227 V) is displayed.
•
Disconnect the ICC from the power and remove the connecting cable from MP1 and MP2.
ICC 350
ICC 300
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
Ab
2
U NTG
I NTG
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
I NTG V1
nUI
before activation
nUI
during activation
• U NTG
Power supply voltage [V];
Set value = 223 V
• I NTG
Power supply current [mA];
Set value = 447 mA
• I NTG V1 Amplified power supply current [mA]
• nUI
Adjustment of the current voltage setting of the power supply generator
ICC 200
AUTO CUT
U NTG
AUTO COAG
nUI
before activation
I NTG
after activation
• U NTG
Power supply voltage [V];
Set value = 223 V
• I NTG
Power supply current [mA];
Set value = 447 mA
58 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment 2
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Power supply unit output parameters
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
59 / 266
Adjustment 3
Actuation pulse length HF generator
Procedure
•
Measure the actuation pulse TS1 on the control board (slot J3) with an oscilloscope at measuring
point MP6 = GND and MP2 = probe tip.
•
Switch on the ICC and call up Test program 16, Adjustment 3.
•
Using TP14 on the control board (slot J3), set a pulse length of 350 ns.
ATTENTION: Pulse is inverted.
•
Disconnect the ICC from the power.
•
Remove the probe from MP6 and MP2.
ICC 350
ICC 300
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
Ab
3
• thF
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
thF
Pulse length of the HF generator [ms];
auto. activated
Set value = 350 ns
ICC 200
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
thF
• thF
Pulse length of the HF generator [ms];
62 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
auto. activated
Set value = 350 ns
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment 3
Actuation pulse length HF generator
5 V/Div
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
100 ns/Div
Fig.: Transistor switching pulse
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
63 / 266
Adjustment 4
Phase relationship HF generator
Procedure
•
Switch the ICC back on and call up Test program 16, Adjustment 4.
•
With probe 100 : 1, the no-load HF output voltage between the active and neutral electrode must be
measured; for 2 monopolar outputs: Output CUT / COAG 2.
•
Activate the ICC using the yellow footswitch pedal (AUTO CUT).
•
Observing the output voltage form, increase the power supply voltage in the CUT field (AUTO CUT
display corresponds to the set power supply voltage; AUTO COAG 1 display corresponds to the
actual power supply voltage). Using TP15 on the control board (slot J3), a symmetrical sine-wave
characteristic must be set.
•
At a maximum power supply voltage (= 250 V), make the final adjustment. At the same time, set a
good symmetrical sine-wave shape and a minimum power supply current (= display in AUTO BIPOLAR field), which means a minimal no-load power loss (see Fig.). CAUTION: The best possible
sine-wave characteristic has priority over the absolute current minimum.
ICC 350
ICC 300
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
U SOLL = 30 V
4
U SOLL
U NTG
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
I NTG V1
• U SOLL
Set power supply voltage [V]
• U NTG
Power supply unit voltage [V]
Ph
before activation
I NTG
during activation
• I NTG V1 Amplified power supply current [mA]
• I NTG
Power supply current [mA]
ICC 200
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
U SOLL (Start = 30 V)
nPh
before activation
U SOLL
U NTG
after activation
• U SOLL
Set power supply voltage [V]
• U NTG
Power supply unit voltage [V]
66 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment 4
Phase relationship HF generator
300 V/Div
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
500 ns/Div
Fig.: HF no-load voltage
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
67 / 266
Adjustment 5
HF generator output parameters
Procedure
•
Call up Test program 16, Adjustment 5.
•
Connect the HF power meter, e.g. APM 600 (set to 500 ohms) via active cable to active and neutral
electrode output sockets on the ICC; for 2 monopolar outputs: CUT / COAG 2 output and NE socket.
•
Activate the unit with the yellow pedal of the footswitch (AUTO CUT).
•
Using TP3 on the control board (slot J3), the HF output voltage is set in such a way that a power of
100 watts is indicated on the HF power meter and a value of 223 volts HF effective voltage (tolerance
220…223 volts) in the display on the AUTO CUT field.
•
Under certain conditions, TP 4 (HF current limitation) must be turned back far enough before this
setting so that no current limitation is effective.
•
Using TP4 on the control board (slot J3), the HF current limitation is set in such a way that a value of
447 mA effective HF current (tolerance 439…447 mA) with constant power output appears in the
AUTO COAG 1 field.
•
Insofar as the measurement of the phase angle between HF voltage and HF current produces a value
greater than 98 (which is 100 · cos j) at this setting in the AUTO COAG 2 field, a value of 100 watts
HF power output is displayed (tolerance 97...100 watts) in the AUTO BIPOLAR field after correct
adjustment of voltage and current.
•
For the voltage characteristic at a 500 ohms load, see Fig.
ICC 350
ICC 300
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
Ab
5
U HF
I HF
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
cos Phi
UI
before activation
P
during activation
ICC 200
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
U HF
UI
before activation
I HF
after activation
• U HF
HF voltage [V];
• I HF
Real part of HF current [mA];
70 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Set value = 223 V
Set value = 447 mA
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment 5
HF generator output parameters
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
100 V/Div
Fig.: HF voltage at
R = 500 ohms
500 ns/Div
• cos Phi
Phase angle 0…100*)
•P
Emitted active power
Set value = 100
[W];
Set value = 100 watts at 500 R
cos-j display, when the “Up” (8) key is pressed.
P display, when the“Down” (9) key is pressed.
*)To avoid decimal places, the value of the table value of cos j is indicated times 100, such that 100 means cos j = 1.
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
71 / 266
Adjustment 6
HF generator output parameters amplified
Procedure
•
Call up Test program 16, Adjustment 6.
•
With the same setup as for Adjustment 5, the unit is activated. At the same time, 5 watts (tolerance
4.5…5.5 watts) should be output at the HF power meter.
•
Using TP 5 on the control board (slot J 3), the amplified HF voltage measurement is set in such a way
that a value of 50 volts HF output voltage is displayed in the AUTO CUT field.
•
Using TP 6 on the control board, the amplified HF current measurement is set. The value 100 mA Hf
output current is displayed in the AUTO COAG 1 field when set correctly.
•
In the Auto Bipolar field, the emitted active power is displayed.
•
In the Auto Coag 2 field, the phase angle cos j is displayed.
ICC 350
ICC 300
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
Ab
6
U HF
I HF
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
cos Phi
UI
before activation
P
during activation
ICC 200
AUTO CUT
U HF
AUTO COAG
UI
before activation
I HF
after activation
• U HF
HF voltage amplified [V];
Set value = 50 V
• I HF
Real part of the amplified HF current [mA]; Set value = 100 mA
• cos Phi
Phase angle 0…100 from the table
Set value = 100
•P
Emitted active power
Set value = 5 watts at 500 R
[W];
ICC 200:
cos-j display appears when the “Up” (8) key is pressed.
P-display appears when the “Down” (9) key is pressed.
74 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment 6
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
HF generator output parameters amplified
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
75 / 266
Adjustment 7
Phase angle (cos j)
Procedure
•
Call up Test program 16, Adjustment 7.
•
Using ERBE original cable, connect the APM 600 (set at 500 ohms) to the ICC; with 2 monopolar
connections: Connect active output socket: CUT / COAG 2 (ICC 300 / 350) and NE socket.
•
Connect a capacitor with 1 nF (e.g. ERBE component no. EE 51103-026) with short lines across the
active electrode and NE sockets on the HF power meter.
This produces a phase shift between voltage and current of 45° at a frequency of 340 kHz.
•
Activate the cut footswitch.
•
Using TP 7 on the control board (slot J3), the unit is set in such a way a value of 73 (display is
100 · cos j) is displayed in the AUTO CUT field and a value of 120 (analog / digital converter
measured value) is displayed in the AUTO COAG 1 field.
ICC 350
ICC 300
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
Ab
7
PHI
before activation
COS
xxx
PHI
during activation
ICC 200
AUTO CUT
COS
• COS
AUTO COAG
PHI
before activation
xxx
after activation
cos-j values from table;
Set value = 73
0 means phase shifting = 90°
100 means phase shifting = 0°
• xxx
Analog cos-j measurement value;
• Veff
HF output voltage;
Range 0…255
200 mA output current limitation
78 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment 7
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Phase angle (cos j)
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
79 / 266
Adjustment 8
Spark monitor
Procedure (also applies to the units without HIGH CUT or ENDO CUT)
•
On the ICC 300 and ICC 200 without ENDOCUT, TP8 should be set to the upper limit (to do this,
turn TP8 clockwise).
•
Call up Test program 16, Adjustment 8.
•
A DC voltage of 70 volts is fed into the patient circuit between the center control for the active AE
socket (with 2 monopolar outputs: Output CUT / COAG 2) and the neutral electrode NE socket (AE =
+, NE = –). To do this, the ERBE TESTBOX 70 volts is recommended (ERBE Order no. 20100-019).
•
Adjust TP8 on the control board (slot J3) is set in such a way that a measurement value of 77 is
indicated for the A/D converter, and a value of 70 volts DC is displayed in the AUTO COAG 1 field.
On the ICC 200 ENDOCUT, this value appears in the AUTO CUT field, while the A/D converter
value is not shown.
ICC 350
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
xxx
yyy
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
FU
Standby
ICC 200 ENDO CUT
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
yyy
FU
Standby
• yyy
Fed-in DC voltage for the spark measurement value (70 V)
• xxx
Analog spark measurement value
The input for applying the test DC voltage is the CUT / COAG 2 socket.
82 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment 8
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Spark monitor
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
83 / 266
Adjustment 9
NESSY resistance measurement
Procedure
•
Call up Test program 16, Adjustment 9.
•
Connect an NE cable to the NE input receptacle on the ICC system.
•
Connect the other end of the NE cable between 120 ohms of resistance.
•
Set TP9 on the control board (slot J3) in such a way that a measurement value of 200 for the A/D
converter is displayed in the AUTO CUT field and a resistance of 120 ohms is displayed in the AUTO
COAG 1 field.
•
Now exchange the terminating resistor for a resistance value of 40 ohms. Now verify the measurement
at this resistance; a resistance of 40 ohms (tolerance 37...43 ohms) must be displayed in the AUTO
COAG 1 field.
ICC 350
ICC 300
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
xxx
R üb
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
r
Standby
ICC 200
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
xxx
R üb
Standby
• R üb
Contact resistance at the neutral electrode [W]
• xxx
Analog measurement value of the contact resistance.
For resistance values outside the measurement accurary, the display --- appears.
86 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment 9
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
NESSY resistance measurement
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
87 / 266
Adjustment 10
HF leakage current measurement
Procedure (This adjustment only applies to the ICC 350)
•
Call up Test program 16, Adjustment 10.
•
Connect the HF power meter (set to 350 ohms load resistance) between the active electrode of the
CUT / COAG 2 (center) socket and the potential equalization.
•
Jumper J3 must be plugged into the display board for this adjustment (earthed reference).
•
Short together the NE-ERBE original adapter cable. Activate the ICC 350 using the blue footswitch
pedal (AUTO COAG 1).
•
Using the power setting in the AUTO COAG 1 field, set the leakage current flowing to ground to a
value of 150 mAeff (tolerance 131…169 mA) (use an HF effective current meter or set a power of 7.9
watts at a HF power meter with a load resistance of 350 ohms [tolerance 6.0…10 watts (from P = I² · R
with P = 7.9 watts and R = 350 ohms is a current I = 150 mA)]).
•
Set TP10 on the control board (slot J3) in such a way that the HF leakage alarm is thus displayed
visually (the LED in the safety field flashes in the display indicates the value 50 in the Auto Cut
field).
•
Increase the leakage current by changing the power setting until an audible alarm is also emitted.
This should occur at 300…350 mA (accordingly 31.5…43 watts on a HF power meter at the above
setting).
ICC 350
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
xxx
ppp
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
HFL
• ppp
Set SOFT COAG power which can be changed during activation.
• xxx
Measurement value of the HF leakage current measurement.
Standby
Using the power setting in the AUTO COAG 1 field, set the HF leakage current flowing to ground at
Ieff = 150 mA. This is not assigned for the ICC 200 and 300 since no HF leakage current monitor is
available there.
90 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment 10
HF leakage current measurement
ICC
AE
APM 600
NE
AE
Potential equalization
NE cable with pin
short-circuit
I
HF leakage
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
3 m cable
NE
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
91 / 266
Adjustment 11
Contact monitor
Procedure
•
Call up Test program 16, Adjustment 11.
•
At the BIPOLAR output of the ICC, the ERBE bipolar Testbox for the bipolar automatic starter (EE
20100-017 ) or appropriate fixed resistors (1.2 kOhm and 2.5 kOhm with a capacity of 15 watts as
well as 18 kOhm, 1 watt) is connected via the EE bipolar original cable.
•
With a resistance of 2.5 kOhm (socket 1–2), a value of 25 must be displayed in the AUTO CUT field.
(Display = resistance divided by 100). The setting of the switch-on threshold with PT11 on the PCB
control board (slot J3) proceeds in such a way that, at a load resistance of 2.5 kOhm, the display in
the AUTO COAG 2 field changes from “OFF” to “ON”.
•
Now the short-circuiting monitor is set by connecting a 6 ohm resistor (capacity = 0.5 watts) to the
BIPOLAR outlet. Then, the display »rLo« appears on the AUTO COAG 1 display. Using TP12 on the
PCB control board J3, the display is set to a measurement value of 100 in the AUTO CUT display.
•
Testing the shutdown response: To do this, exit Test program 16 briefly by selecting Test program 0.
The ICC operates in the normal mode. Switch on AUTO START 1. Set the bipolar power to 1 watt.
The BIPOLAR outlet is connected to sockets 1 and 3 on the ERBE Testbox and thereby charged with
1.2 kOhm. The BIPOLAR generator must automatically be activated after the delay time. Now press
pushbutton 1 on the Testbox. This raises the capacity resistance to 18 kOhm. The BIPOLAR generator
must now shut down.
•
This test must be repeated at the power settings 20 watts, 40 watts, 50 watts (or without AAMI
standard up to 120 watts).
ICC 350
ICC 300
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
uuu
OFF
br
open output
rda
ON
br
loaded output
iii
rLo
br
loaded output
ICC 200
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
uuu
OFF
open output
rda
ON
loaded output
94 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment 11
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Contact monitor
• uuu Standby measurement value of the contact monitor at a preset bipolar power of 10 watts
• rda Calculated contact resistance at activation [W/100]
• iii
Amplified output current at contact resistance < 1 kW
• rLo Display if resistance measured at activation < 1 kW
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
95 / 266
Adjustment 12
Pulse/pause length ST output stage
Procedure
•
Call up Test program 16, Adjustment 12.
•
Measure actuation impulse TSI_STE at measuring point MP 3 on ST output stage (slot J6) with the
oscilloscope (measuring point MP1 = GND).
•
Using TP16, set this to a pulse length of 200 ns (±50 ns).
IMPORTANT! The pulse time is measured at average amplitude, i.e. at approx. 7.5 volts level.
ATTENTION! The pulse is inverted.
•
The repetition frequency at TP17 is set in such a way that the value 0 (tolerance 0...4) is displayed in
the AUTO CUT field.
•
Now exit the test program and return the ICC to normal operating condition.
•
To check the performance, connect the HF output to the HF power meter, setting 500 ohms.
•
Activate the ICC using the blue footswitch pedal at the SPRAY and FORCED normal settings. The
power output in watts should correspond to the display in the AUTO COAG 2 field.
•
Check whether the maximum emitted output power with SPRAY and FORCED is within the tolerance
limits (120 W ± 15 %). If necessary, conform the pulse length to the PCB control board using TP16.
TP17 must no longer be changed.
ICC 350
ICC 300
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
xxx
ppp
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
tSt
Standby
ICC 200
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG
xxx
tSt
Standby
• ppp Set AUTO COAG 2 FORCED power
• xxx Difference = Set frequency minus actual frequency
98 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment 12
Pulse/pause length ST output stage
5 V/Div
50 ns/Div
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Fig. : Transistor switching pulse ST
output stage
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
99 / 266
Adjustment 13
LF leakage current monitor (ICC 350 only)
Procedure
•
Call up Test program 16, Adjustment 13.
•
Set the jumper to the “capacitance grounded” operating mode (place jumper J3 on display board).
•
Perform adjustment using ERBE TESTBOX 2 or another 50 Hz sine-wave current source.
•
Between the neutral electrode output and the potential equalization, feed a 50 Hz sine-wave current
of 45 µA (see Figure).
•
Using TP1 on the motherboard, set the leakage current monitor in such a way that the display in the
AUTO CUT field changes just from 0 to 1 at 45 µAeff.
Reset jumper to previous condition.
ICC 350
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
x
I nF
•x
Standby
x = 0 for LF leakage current < 50 µA
x = 1 for LF leakage current > 50 µA.
For adjustment, the test current must be fed according to the instructions.
Adjustment 13 is not assigned on the ICC 300 and ICC 200.
Measurement setup
Battery-powered
measurement unit
only!
INF
ICC
AE
NE
+
ERBE
Testbox 2
18
N
LI
PE
19
102 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
Power
supply
110 V
115 V
230 V
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment 13
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
LF leakage current monitor
TP1
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
103 / 266
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Adjustment of
ICC 350 ZMK Neurotest
Version V2.00
ICC 350 TUR Neurotest
Version V2.00
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
105 / 266
Adjustment of Neurotest
board
Neurotest board
EE 30128-070
Jumper JP4 on the front panel is used to activate the display of the feedback frequency of output current
measurement and display of the feedback frequency of the remote control are activated.
ATTENTION
On the ZMK version, there is a display only during activation and if the Neurotest circuit is closed. On the
TUR version there is a display as soon as the NT LED lights up on the remote control.
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
SPH
Intensity no.
Frequency measurement Current measurement
SPH:
The Neurotest program is activated.
Intensity no.
Set intensity number is 1…5. It corresponds to the intensity number which has been set
on the remote control.
Frequency measurement Measurement of feedback frequency of the remote control.
Current measurement
Measurement of feedback frequency of the output current measurement.
Setting the feedback frequency of output current measurement
(trimming potentiometer TP 1: Setting the feedback frequency)
The Neurotest board is isolated and actuated via optocoupler. The feedback frequency of the output current
measurement also takes place via an optocoupler. The output current pulse is converted into a frequency.
This frequency can be measured at test point MP7. Test point MP6 is reference ground. Test points MP6 and
MP7 relate to the electronic circuitry of the ICC unit. Without activation, the feedback frequency is 0 Hz.
After the pulse time, the feedback frequency is only available at MP7 for a brief period.
Test setup
At the Neurotest output, connect up a test resistor of 1 kOhm, 0.5 W and 1%. On the TUR version, the
Neurotest output is between the neutral electrode and the CUT/COAG 2 output. The TUR version is activated
with the yellow pedal of the dual-pedal footswitch. On the ZMK version the Neurotest output is between the
neutral electrode and the Neurotest output. The ZMK version is activated with the ZMK fingerswitch.
The setting is performed at intensity 3. For this setting the set feedback frequency must be adjusted to 73. If
the electronic fuse trips, the display of feedback frequency is approx. 40.
106 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment of Neurotest
board
Neurotest board
EE 30128-070
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
Current measurement
Set
Min.
Max.
SPH
1
52
42
75
SPH
2
91
81
100
SPH
3
(Set value 73)
73
63
83
SPH
4
64
54
74
SPH
5
59
49
69
ATTENTION!
Don't forget to remove the jumper!
Check the fusible link for correct rating
F1: Microfuse FF 1/16 /125 V (62 mA), Wickmann Type 19278K
High-voltage test
The high-voltage test is conducted according to the specifications in the test record.
Testing the activation signals
The TUR version is activated with the yellow pedal of the double-pedal footswitch. The ZMK version is
activated with the ZMK fingerswitch.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Performance test on the constant-current circuit
A test resistor of 1k, 0.5W and 1% and a rotary potentiometer of 50k 0.3W are connected in series at the
Neurotest output. Measure the square-wave voltage on the 1k test resistor. (1mA corresponds to 1V) The
tolerance range of output currents is +25% to –25%. Larger deviations generate an output error display.
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
107 / 266
Adjustment of Neurotest
board
Neurotest board
EE 30128-070
Square-wave output peak current
Control range of constant-current source
SPH 1: 5 mA
0R…approx. 20 kOhm
SPH 2: 10 mA
0R…approx. 10 kOhm
SPH 3: 15 mA
0R…approx. 6 kOhm
SPH 4: 20 mA
0R…approx. 5 kOhm
SPH 5: 25 mA
0R…approx. 4 kOhm
Testing the constant-current source
Slowly set the rotary potentiometer higher from 0R. At a total resistance of approx. 6 kOhm, there is an
output error display. At approx. 6 kOhm, the output current is constant.
Performance test on output error monitoring.
•
At the Neurotest output connect a test resistor of 1 kOhm, 0.5 W and 1%.
•
Set SPH 1.
•
Activate the unit. When the circuit is interrupted there will be an output error message.
Performance test on the electronic fuse
The output current is monitored constantly. In the event of an excess dose, the electronic fuse trips and via
longitudinal transistor T3 switches off the constant-current source supply voltage. The electronic fuse is
monitored in the interval between the pulses. If the electronic fuse has tripped, this is indicated by the
message ERROR 90 or ERROR 84.
•
To trip the electronic fuse: Activate the Neurotest function and briefly connect test point MP9 to MP2.
The electronic fuse should respond. The microfuse must not trip.
General information about the self-check
Before activation, or when setting the intensity on the remote control, there is a check on the electronic fuse
in two steps.
1.
Briefly switch on transistor T1 and thus trip the electronic fuse. There is a message ERROR 90 or
ERROR 84 if the electronic fuse has tripped.
2.
Briefly switch on transistor T2 and thus reset the electronic fuse. There is a message if the electronic
fuse has not been reset.
108 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment of Neurotest
board
Neurotest board
EE 30128-070
Activation test
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Activation of the HF LED on the remote control takes place at intensity setting 0 using the rotary switch on
PC board EE 30121-442. At an intensity setting of 1 to 5 the NT LED is actuated by the CPU and the HF
LED must not light up. On the TUR version a check must be performed as to whether activation of the HF
is inhibited when intensity of 1 ... 5 is set. On the ZMK version, activation of the HF is possible even if
intensity 1 ... 5 has been set.
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
109 / 266
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Adjustment of
remote control for
Neurotest
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
111 / 266
Adjustment of
remote control for Neurotest
Neurotest board
EE 30121-442
Setting the remote control for Neurotest board EE 30121-442
Jumper JP4 on the front panel is used to activate the display of the feedback frequency of output current
measurement and display of the feedback frequency of the remote control are activated.
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
SPH
Intensity no.
Frequency measurement Current measurement
ATTENTION!
On the ZMK version, there is a display only during activation and if the Neurotest circuit is closed. On the
TUR version there is a display as soon as the NT LED lights up on the remote control.
SPH:
The Neurotest program is activated.
Intensity no.
Set intensity number is 1…5. Corresponds to the intensity number
which has been set on the remote control.
Frequency measurement Measurement of feedback frequency of the remote control.
Current measurement
Measurement of feedback frequency of the output current measurement.
Setting the feedback frequency for intensity setting
(trimming potentiometer TP 1: Setting feedback frequency)
The intensity setting is converted to a frequency. This frequency can be measured at Pin 1 AD654 on IC1.
Test point MP6 is reference ground. Frequency is measured using a frequency meter. The setting takes
place at intensity 5 - for this setting the set feedback frequency is adjusted to 38.0 Hz (–0.5 Hz, +0.0 Hz) on
the frequency meter.
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
Frequency measurement
Currency [Hz]
Set
Min.
Max.
Set
Min.
Max.
SPH
1
7
5
10
200
180
215
SPH
2
14
11
20
105
80
120
SPH
3
(Set value 73)
24
21
28
62
57
67
SPH
4
32
29
36
45
43
49
SPH
5
38
37
60
38
37
40
112 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment of
remote control for Neurotest
Neurotest board
EE 30121-442
ATTENTION!
Don’t forget to remove the jumper.
Setting the feedback frequency for intensity adjustment can also be performed without the ICC unit by
supplying +15 V to the remote control and measuring the feedback frequency using the frequency meter.
High-voltage test
The high-voltage test is performed using the specifications in the test record.
Testing the LED display
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Actuation of the HF LED is conducted at intensity setting 0 using the rotary switch PC board on EE 30121442. At an intensity setting of 1 to 5, the NT LED is actuated by the CPU and the HF LED must not light up.
The NT LED only lights up when the feedback frequency is in the valid range. Check intensity setting 1…5.
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
113 / 266
Adjustment of activation
and instrument detection
MIC board 30128-200 (V4.0)
List of units involved
ICC 350 MIC-MIEN
V4.0 EE 10128-080
ICC 350 MIC-MIEN-DOKU
V4.0 EE 10128-081
ICC 350 MIC-MIEN F
V4.0 EE 10128-082
ICC 350 MIC-MIEN Int.
V4.0 EE 10128-083
ICC 350 MIC-MIEN Int UL
V4.0 EE 10128-215
ICC 350 MIC-MIEN Japan, 100V
V4.0 EE 10128-310
Identification of the trimming potentiometers:
Trimming potentiometer TP 1: setting the instrument detection.
Trimming potentiometer TP 2: setting the activation detection.
Valid instrument number
Program no.
Instrument
Resistance
Instrument no.
12 MIC
TEM instrument EE 20191-275
10 Ohm ± 1 %; 0,2 W
1
13 MIEN
Probe EE 20191-356
30 Ohm ± 1 %; 0,2 W
2
13 MIEN
Probe EE 20191-357
30 Ohm ± 1 %; 0,2 W
2
The probes of no. 2 are only suitable for coagulation and CUT remains inhibited.
Display of instrument number
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
Inr.
Nr.
p3
nd
Inr.
Instrument recognized
No.
Instrument number
p3
Power setting AUTO COAG 2
–nd
Compressed air valve for needle control is actuated (only MIC)
nd
Compressed air valve for needle control is not actuated (only MIC)
116 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment of activation
and instrument detection
MIC board 30128-200
Setting the instrument detection
•
The setting takes place in program 12 MIC.
•
Connect a resistor of 51 R, ± 1% and 0.2W to the test line.
ATTENTION!
The original ERBE TEM connecting cable EE 20192-086 has a cable impedance of 1 Ohm per cable, which
produces a series resistance of 2 Ohms for the instrument detection. In the line to and from the unit the
instrument test line must have a series resistance of < 0.5 Ohm. Since on the V4.00 version only the TEM
instrument no. 1 and MIEN probe no. 1 are connected up, it is sufficient to perform the balance only for
these instruments.
With jumper JP4 on the front panel the measurement display is activated.
Measurement display
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
I measurement
I no.
I-measurement
Measurement of instrument detection 0…255
I-No.
Instrument number
Using trimming potentiometer TP 1, set I measurement to 52 (resistance of 51 R ± 1%; 0.2 W).
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Testing the instrument detection
1
Detection resistance
Instrument no.
0R
0
0…2
10 R
1
3…20
30 R
2
21…45
51 R
3
set value 52
62 R
4
70…91
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Valid range
117 / 266
Adjustment of activation
and instrument detection
MIC board 30128-200
Setting of activation detection
Set the trimming potentiometer TP 2 to approximately the center position.
ATTENTION!
Never forget to remove jumper JP4.
Test instructions for program 12 MIC
•
•
Assignment of MIC output socket for the MIC program:
Pin 1:
NE 1
Pin 2:
NE 2 not assigned
Pin 3:
CUT cutting function
Pin 4:
Instrument detection between Pin 1 and Pin 4
Pin 5:
Activation detection between Pin 1 and Pin 5
Set and test instrument detection and activation detection:
Test instrument detection together with the TEM instrument EE 20191-275 and connecting cable EE
20192-086 in the MIC program.
•
Connect up the compressed air supply:
The MIC output socket is active in the MIC program. Connect up to the compressed air supply (max.
5 bar). Connect up 10 Ohm detection resistor corresponding to TEM instrument no. 1.
•
Test CUT function:
The CUT function is activated with the yellow footswitch.
MIC socket
AUTO CUT
APM
P [Watt]
NE1
CUT
Effect 3
40 W
500 Ohm
40 ± 15 %
ATTENTION!
The measuring system will be damaged beyond repair if the HF lines are connected up to the APM incorrectly.
118 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment of activation
and instrument detection
MIC board 30128-200
The output error display is activated at 40 W and 500 Ohm. Activation of the BIPOLAR CUT function
is also possible without the neutral electrode.
•
Compressed air control
At instrument 1 the compressed air valve is opened during CUT activation. The compressed air valve
controls the needle of the TEM instrument. After activation the needle reset time elapses. After needle
reset time has elapsed the compressed air valve closes and the needle is reset. Needle reset time is
indicated in test program 23. Check the compressed air valve to make sure that it operates properly
and to ensure there are no leaks.
•
Check monopolar coagulation
Activation of the SOFT function and the FORCED function is performed using the blue footswitch.
MIC socket
NE1
ICC 350 NE Electrode
AUTO COAG 2
APM
P [Watt]
SOFT 120 Watt
75 Ohm
120 ± 15 %
FORCED 60 Watt
350 Ohm
60 ± 15 %
Test instructions for program 13 MIEN
•
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
•
Assignment of the MIC output socket for the MIEN program
Pin 1:
NE 1 bipolar
Pin 2:
CUT and COAG function bipolar. (MIEN protective circuit).
Pin 3:
not assigned
Pin 4:
Instrument detection between Pin 1 and Pin 4
Pin 5:
Activation detection between Pin 1 and Pin 5
Test instrument detection.
Test instrument detection together with the MIEN probe EE 20191-305/308 and handlepiece EE
20191-306 in the MIEN program.
•
Test bipolar CUT function
The CUT function is activated using the yellow footswitch.
ATTENTION!
The measuring system will be damaged beyond repair if the HF lines are connected up to the APM incorrectly.
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
119 / 266
Adjustment of activation
and instrument detection
MIC board 30128-200
MIC socket
AUTO COAG 2
APM
P [Watt]
NE1 CUT
Effect 3
15 Watt
500 Ohm
15 ± 3 (W)
The output error display is activated at 40 W and 500 Ohms. Activation of the bipolar CUT function is also
possible without the neutral electrode.
•
Test bipolar SOFT coagulation
The SOFT function is activated with the blue footswitch.
•
MIC socket
AUTO COAG 2
APM
P [Watt]
NE1 CUT
SOFT 15 Watt
500 Ohm
No-load voltage 84 ± 5 Vp
7 ± 2 (W)
Test the protective circuit with test program 18
In the event of an error, the protective circuit in the MIEN program prevents an overdose of HF
voltage and HF current. If the output current is too high, the fusible link in the protective circuit trips.
The test checks whether the correct fuse is inserted. The manufacturer of the fuse and the fuse rating
can be found in the parts list.
•
Testing the voltage limitation with no load
Activate test program 18.
In the AUTO CUT display panel the set value of HF output voltage is displayed. With the CUT “Up/
Down” buttons, the HF output voltage can be adjusted in the range from 260Vp to 500 Vp (±50Vp).
Connect oscilloscope to the MIC output socket NE1 and CUT.
The highest HF peak voltage at the AUTO CUT Effect 3 (15 W) setting is 340 Vp. At this voltage the
protective circuit must not yet impose any limitation.
The protective circuit limits the output voltage from 360 Vp upward. Range in which the limitation
must be activated: 360–450 Vp.
At the setting of 499 Vp the fuse will not trip and the operability of the protective circuit remains
intact.
ATTENTION!
As soon as the voltage limitation is activated, current flows through the protective diodes and the diodes heat
up. The duration of the test from the moment of voltage limitation must not exceed 5 seconds or else the
protective diodes break down and the circuit will have to be repaired.
120 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Adjustment of activation
and instrument detection
MIC board 30128-200
Voltage limitation at setting of 415 V p.
ATTENTION! The test duration must
not exceed 5 seconds!
Voltage limitation at setting of 499 V p.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
ATTENTION! The test duration must
not exceed 5 seconds!
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
121 / 266
Test program no. 17
Brightness setting of the 7-segment displays
General description
Using this program, you can adapt the brightness of the 7-segment displays in 10 stages to the lighting
conditions of the room.
After starting the test program, you will see the following display:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
Int
xx
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
• Int Intensity (brightness) of the displays
• xx Present intensity, adjustable from 1...10.
You can make the intensity brighter using the “Up” (8) key or darker using the “Down” (9) key.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
After termination of the test program, store the brightness setting with key 3.
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
123 / 266
Test program no. 23
Changing the delay time with
AUTO START
General description
Using this program, you can change the specifications for the delay time when activating AUTO START.
The delay time is the time which passes after the forceps contacted the tissue and the HF generator is
actuated.
So that the operating surgeon can know whether the forceps have contacted the tissue, the AUTO BIPOLAR activation display (blue triangle in the AUTO-BIPOLAR field) switches on at contact. Then the delay
time starts. After the delay time has passed, the HF generator and the activation tone are switched on.
In case of error in the memory medium, the following basic settings have been preset:
ICC 350 and ICC 300:
ICC 200:
AUTO START 0:
0 seconds,
AUTO START 1:
0.5 seconds,
AUTO START 2:
1 second;
AUTO START:
0.5 seconds.
After starting Test program 23, you will see the following display:
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
SEt
Up
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
tt.t
Time setting
Possible from 0.1 to 10 seconds in the following time steps:
from 0.1 to 2.0 seconds in 0.1 seconds steps
from 2.0 to 10.0 seconds in 0.5 seconds steps.
Procedure for ICC 350
AUTO START
Setting range
0
0 greater than/equal to t greater than/equal to 1
1
1 greater than/equal to t greater than/equal to 2
2
2 greater than/equal to t greater than/equal to 10 seconds
You can set and store the delay time for every user-specific program 0 to 9 and for every AUTO-START
time (0, 1 and 2).
Since the AUTO-START time 0 can be no longer than AUTO-START time 1, it is best to proceed from the
longest time for AUTO START 2 and then set the times for AUTO START 1 and AUTO START 0.
124 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Test program no. 23
Changing the delay time for
AUTO START
NOTE
You will find the assignment of keys with the numbers given below on pages 1-4 (Calling up of the test
program mode) of this Service Manual.
1. Using key 2
Set program number
2. Using key 14
Set AUTO START 2
3. Using “Up” or “Down” key Set the required time
4. Using key 14
Set AUTO START 1
5. Using “Up” or “Down” key Set the required time
6. Using key 14
Set AUTO START 0
7. Using the “Up” or “Down” key
Set the required time
8. Using key 1
Store the set values.
Steps 1 to 8 can be repeated individually for every required program.
Then exit the test program using key 3.
Procedure for ICC 300
AUTO START
Setting range
0
0 greater than/equal to t greater than/equal to 1
1
1 greater than/equal to t greater than/equal to 2
2
2 greater than/equal to t greater than/equal to 10 seconds
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
For every AUTO START time (0, 1 and 2), you can set and store a delay time. Since the AUTO-START time
0 cannot be any longer than the AUTO-START time 1, it is best to proceed from the longest time for AUTO
START 2 and then set the times for AUTO START 1 and AUTO START 0.
1. Using key 14
Set AUTO START 2
2. Using the “Up” or “Down” key
Set the required time
3. Using key 14
Set AUTO START 1
4. Using the “Up” or “Down” key
Set the required time
5. Using key 14
Set AUTO START 0
6. Using the “Up” or “Down” key
Set the required time
7. Using key 3
Exit the test program and the set values
are stored.
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
125 / 266
Test program no. 23
Changing the delay time for
AUTO START
Procedure for ICC 200
AUTO CUT
AUTO COAG 1
SEt
Up
AUTO COAG 2
AUTO BIPOLAR
tt.t
For the AUTO START function, you can set and store a delay time.
1. Using the “Up” or “Down” key
Set the required time
2. Using key 3
The set values are stored and the test program is
exited.
126 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
TEST PROGRAMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Chapter 2
ERROR list
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ERROR list V 4.X
ERBOTOM ICC 350 (V4.0, V2.0), ICC 300 (V3.0),
ICC 200 (V2.0)
Automatic error detection, indication and documentation
ERBOTOM ICC series high-frequency surgical units are equipped with a device for automatic error detection,
indication and documentation (ERROR monitor).
Error detection, indication, documentation
For ERBOTOM ICC series equipment as of software version 2.0 / 4.0, the ERROR monitor can, depending
on the type of equipment and its outfit, detect up to 91 currently occurring errors (ERROR) and indicate them
on the display.
Error numbers (ERROR nos.) are assigned to the various errors. If an error is detected, it is immediately
reported. The error report is both visual and audible.
The error numbers of detected errors are automatically stored chronologically. Since only 10 memory locations
are available, only the last 10 error messages are displayed. If the same error is detected several times in a row,
the corresponding error number is then saved only once in consideration of the limited number of available
memory locations. The error numbers documented in memory can be displayed via Test program 2 and
deleted.
Troubleshooting for ICC family equipment
The ICC unit family is equipped with an error detection system which detects and stores the last 10 errors
detected in an ERROR list. This error memory can be called up via Test program no. 2. The user should thus
be capable of localizing errors himself and deciding whether this is an operating error or an error in the
accessories, which he can possibly eliminate himself, or whether it is necessary to make use of the technical
service.
If there is a complete failure of the system and no display is visible, the power supply may have been
interrupted or the voltage supply inside the unit is defective. In such a case, first check whether the outlet
used is live or a fuse in the house power supply has been tripped (Does a different unit function at this
outlet?). If the outlet used is live, check the powerline to the unit and replace if necessary. The equipment
fuses on the rear panel should also be checked and replaced if necessary.
ATTENTION!
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Only use original fuses of the same specification.
If these efforts bring no results, there is probably an error within the unit. You should then contact the
technical service.
For a malfunction with a properly functioning display but with no indication of an ERROR number in the
display, the error may be located in defective accessories. It is possible, for example, that there may be a
defect in the fingerswitch or footswitch, or a disruption in the associated connecting cable. The cause of the
error may be determined by exchanging the accessories used.
To determine other causes of errors, an ERROR number in the unit display indicates the course of further
action according to the following table.
2
ERROR LIST
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
129 / 266
ERROR no. 1–13
Error
no. Designation and remedies
No HF voltage present at the HF voltage sensor. Error in the HF generator.
1 Short circuit in accessories: Replace accessories.
Other equipment error: Technical Service.
2
HF output voltage too high, error in the HF generator.
Equipment error: Technical Service.
The switched-mode power supply unit supplies no voltage during activation, error in the
3 switched-mode power supply unit.
Equipment error: Technical Service.
The switched-mode power supply unit supplies too high a voltage upon activation of the ST
4 generator, error in the switched-mode power supply unit.
Equipment error: Technical Service.
LF leakage current is > 50 µA and flows into the unit via the neutral electrode.
Check positioning of the patient, whether there is contact with the infusion stand or the like.
5
Other defective equipment connected to the patient?
Are the potential equalization and grounded conductor OK?
6
During the activation phase, the safety shutoff feature output reports "ON".
Equipment error: Technical Service.
7
During the activation phase, the safety shutoff feature output reports "OFF".
Equipment error: Technical Service.
8 not assigned
Maximum continuous time limit exceeded.
9 Only activate the unit if necessary. The time limit monitor is a safety feature and should
generally only be increased with a strict indication using Test program 10 in the setup.
10
Error during activation of the AUTO CUT, no valid front panel setting.
Confirm control panel by pressing a key. Select required power setting.
11
Error during activation of AUTO COAG 1 or AUTO COAG 2, no valid front panel setting.
Confirm control panel by pressing a key. Select required power setting.
12
Error during activation of AUTO BIPOLAR, no valid front panel setting.
Confirm control panel by pressing a key. Select required power setting.
Error during activation of AUTO CUT:
- NESSY: measured NE impedance is > 120 ohms.
- Using Test program no. 7, split electrodes were set: NE impedance < 10 ohms.
13
Check NE cable.
Check NE contact surface: Short circuit? Is NE stuck to metal?
If necessary, set required neutral electrode using Test program 7.
130 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2 ERROR LIST
ERROR no. 14–22
Error
no. Designation and remedies
14 (not assigned)
15 (not assigned)
16 (not assigned
Error during activation. HF leakage current > 300 mA.
17 Check position of the patient: Contact points with infusion stand or the like.
Otherwise equipment defect: Technical Service.
Error during activation. 150 mA < HF leakage current < 300 mA.
18 Check position of the patient . Eliminate contact points with infusion stand or the like.
Otherwise equipment defect: Technical Service.
Error during activation of AUTO CUT and AUTO COAG: NESSY current density error.
Check NE cable for interruption.
19
Check contact surface and application point of the NE.
Otherwise equipment defect: Technical Service.
For AUTO CUT and AUTO COAG: NESSY current symmetry error.
Variably high current flowing into the joint phases of the NE.
20
Check cable to the NE (interruption).
Check NE contact surface.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
21
Current symmetry error.
See ERROR 20.
When switching on the power, AUTO CUT is switched on.
Activate unit only after switching on power. Check fingerswitch and footswitch as to whether a
22
key or pedal is stuck or the switch is defective.
Otherwise equipment defect: Technical Service.
2
ERROR LIST
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
131 / 266
ERROR no. 23–33
Error
no. Designation and remedies
Switch on the power, AUTO COAG 1 is switched on.
Activate unit only after switching on power. Check fingerswitch and footswitch as to whether
23
key or pedal is stuck or switch is defective.
Otherwise equipment defect: Technical Service.
When switching on the power, AUTO COAG 2 is switched on.
Activate unit only after switching on power. Check fingerswitch and footswitch as to whether
24
key or pedal is stuck or switch is defective.
Otherwise equipment defect: Technical Service.
When switching on the power, AUTO BIPOLAR is switched on by footswitch.
Activate unit only after switching on power. Check footswitch as to whether key or pedal is
25
stuck or switch is defective.
Otherwise equipment defect: Technical Service.
Contact is detected when switching on the power. Contact monitor is active.
Check the forceps connecting cable or check forceps for a short circuit. The forceps tips are
26
touching or lying on a conductive base: Isolate forceps.
Otherwise equipment defect: Technical Service.
Overheating! Internal unit temperature > 100°C. Permissible output power is reduced.
Unit generated max. power for a longer period of time.
27 Allow unit to cool down.
Coagulation electrode too large?
Short circuit or error in accessories?
Activation signal for the blue footswitch button already on.
Is the blue footswitch button depressed? Is the button or switch stuck? If necessary, briefly
28
unplug the footswitch as a test.
First preselect footswitch on the front panel and then switch on.
For Spanish version:
29 During activation, a further activation signal is detected.
Double activation not permissible.
30
Mismatch! Over a time period > 5 sec , the load resistance is < 50 ohms.
Check accessories for short circuit.
Mismatch! The output power is > 100 watts. During activation, the load resistance remains
31 constant and < 300 ohms. After a prescribed time, ERROR 31 appears.
Check accessories for short circuit.
Multiple activation detected.
32 No simultaneous activation via several sources.
If unsuccessful, unit is then defective. Technical Service.
33
At the end of activation, a new activation signal immediately appears.
No simultaneous activation via several sources.
132 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2 ERROR LIST
ERROR no. 34–48
Error
no. Designation and remedies
34
Multiple activation detected during AUTO BIPOLAR .
No simultaneous activation via several sources.
There is already a new activation signal during AUTO BIPOLAR with AUTO STOP or AUTO
35 START.
No simultaneous activation via several sources.
When pressing the BIPOLAR AUTO START key, there is already an AUTO START signal .
The contact monitor is activated.
36
see ERROR no. 26.
Otherwise equipment defect: Technical Service.
Error during activation.
37 At the point in time of activation, the power supply unit voltage has not yet dissipated. Power
supply discharge faulty. Equipment defect: Technical Service.
38
During AUTO START activation, the contact resistance is < 6 ohms.
Inspection of the forceps and supply cable for short circuit.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
39 not assigned
40
Monitor ST generator time control. Output error: ST time control for FORCE and SPRAY.
Actual value > set value plus 20%: Technical Service necessary.
41
Like Error 40, but
Actual value < set value minus 20%: Technical Service necessary.
42
Like Error 41, but
Actual value > set value minus 40%: Technical Service necessary.
43
Monitor of ST generator time control.
Output error. No frequency feedback: Equipment defect: Technical Service.
44
Monitor of the ST generator output voltage.
Output error: Equipment defect: Technical Service.
45
HF generator error during self-check.
HF output voltage too low : Equipment defect: Technical Service.
Self-check.
46 Error within the permissible limits during comparison of the power supply unit voltage with the
HF output voltage. Equipment defect: Technical Service.
HF generator error during self-check.
47 Like Error 46, but error outside permissible limits.
Equipment defect: Technical Service.
Patient current.
48 No signal from the output current monitor.
Equipment defect: Technical Service.
2
ERROR LIST
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
133 / 266
ERROR no. 49–82
Error
no. Designation and remedies
49 not assigned
A key on the front panel is depressed.
50
Operating field key is depressed or defective during the power start-up phase. If it cannot be
to 70
corrected, then equipment defect: Technical Service.
71
Interface error for ICC 350 DOKU: Start or stop bit error or number of bits incorrect.
Equipment defect: Technical Service.
72
Interface error for ICC 350 DOKU: Signal in receiving register has not been read out.
Equipment defect: Technical Service.
73
Interface error for ICC 350 DOKU: Parity sign placed incorrectly.
Equipment defect: Technical Service.
74
Interface error for ICC 350 DOKU: No connection to PC available.
Equipment defect: Technical Service.
75
Interface error for ICC 350 DOKU: Sign stays in transmitter buffer. SIO module not transmitting.
Equipment defect: Technical Service.
76
Interface error for ICC 350 DOKU: Interface storage takes too long; hard disk is too slow.
Equipment defect: Technical Service.
77
not assigned
to 79
ICC 350 NEUROTEST: No valid frequency for the 5-stage intensity setting.
80 Replace remote control.
Otherwise equipment defect: Technical Service.
ICC 350 NEUROTEST: The intensity setting was set to 0 during activation.
81 Do not set anything during activation.
Otherwise equipment defect: Technical Service.
ICC 350 NEUROTEST: NESSY measurement: NE impedance > 120 ohms.
82 Test the neutral electrode and supply line or position of the NE on the patient.
Otherwise equipment defect: Technical Service.
134 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2 ERROR LIST
ERROR no. 83–91
Error
no. Designation and remedies
83
ICC 350 NEUROTEST: Output current too high, but still within the permissible limits.
Equipment defect: Technical Service.
84
ICC 350 NEUROTEST: Output current too high; outside permissible limits.
Equipment defect: Technical Service.
ICC 350 NEUROTEST: No output current. Interruption of the circuit or failure of the frequency
feedback system.
85 Check the neurotest cable supply lines or the handle, NE and cable and replace if
necessary.
Otherwise equipment defect: Technical Service.
ICC 350 NEUROTEST: Output current too low, but within the permissible limits.
Check the neurotest cable supply lines, or the handle, NE and cable, and replace if
86
necessary.
Otherwise equipment defect: Technical Service.
ICC 350 NEUROTEST: Output current too low; current is below the permissible limit.
87 Check neurotest cable.
Otherwise equipment defect: Technical Service.
88
ICC 350 NEUROTEST: Max. time limit has run out. The time limit monitor is a safety measure.
Only activate unit if necessary.
89
ICC 350 NEUROTEST: When switching on the power, already a neurotest activation signal.
Equipment defect: Technical Service.
90
ICC 350 NEUROTEST: Electronic fuse triggered or frequency feedback system has failed.
Equipment defect: Technical Service.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
ICC 350 NEUROTEST: After switching on the neurotest function using the intensity adjuster, a
test determined that the electronic fuse was not triggered or the frequency feedback system
91
has failed.
Equipment defect: Technical Service.
2
ERROR LIST
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
135/ 266
Chapter 3
Circuit description
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Motherboard
The following functions are also found on the motherboard:
•
Starting current limitation
•
Supply voltage changeover and power rectification
•
Power transformer for low voltage supply
•
Rectifier for low voltage
•
Chipselect generation and level adaptation of TTL level to 15 volt level for CMOS components.
•
Generation of the external control bus and of signal lines from the data from PIO outputs
•
HF leakage current measurement
•
HF leakage current limitation
•
Changeover between floating and capacitance-grounded output
•
Input circuit for the footswitch
•
Various level adaptations.
The motherboard detects the other PCBs via connectors and contacts them.
Starting current limitation
The supply voltage moves from the power supply to the motherboard via the connector J 11.
Immediately after switching on the ICC, the supply unit capacitors are charged which causes a heavy
power surge by which, without protective measures, the fuses for the in-house electrical system would be
triggered.
Therefore a starting current limitation has been realized on the motherboard which limits the current peak
to noncritical values after switching on.
The corresponding power current first flows into the ICC via the resistor R5 and the fuse F1. The relay
contacts REL 1 are still briefly opened. Power current is therefore temporarily limited to noncritical values
due to resistor R5.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
As soon as the 24 volt supply voltage is available, relay REL 1 can pick up, bridges resistor R5 and fuse F1
with its relay contacts, and relieves both of them. This short span of time is sufficient to effectively limit the
starting power surge.
LED D2 lights red when the relay REL 1 is actuated and thus serves as a control.
Supply voltage switchover and power rectification
The unit can be changed over either to the 230 volt or 115 volt supply voltage range. The remaining voltage
deviations within the specification are offset by the controlled power supply units.
The supply voltage can be switched over by shifting the connectors J 16 to J 22.
In the 230 volt range, the bridge-connected rectifier BR1 functions as intended as a true bridge circuit. The
wire bridges must be connected as follows:
3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
139 / 266
Motherboard
J 15
free
J 16–J 20
grey
J 17–J 21
brown
J 18–J 22
yellow
J 19
free
In the 115 volt range, the bridge-connected rectifier BR1 operates with the electrolyte capacitors C6, C7 as
a voltage doubler. The wire bridges must be connected as follows:
J 15–J 20
grey
J 16
free
J 17
free
J 18–J 21
brown
J 19–J 22
yellow
For the low voltage supply, there is a transformer TR 1 with rectifier BR2 and filter capacitor C15 on the
motherboard. Here an unregulated DC voltage is provided in the 24 volt range.
Since data are present on the databus for all parts of the circuit simultaneously, it is necessary to separately
determine for which part of the circuit the currently output data is intended. This is realized by the “Chipselect
method” by which the chip to be addressed is selected and addressed using a special “Chipselect signal.”
This signal activates only one among a number of addressable modules. These signals are generated within
the Multiplexer IC 4 and converted in the transistor arrays IC10 and IC11 to 15 volt CMOS level.
The PIO (Parallel Input Output module) produces data in a brief period of time for many different target
assemblies. While the data are only present briefly at the PIOs, the data for target assemblies should be
present longer. For this an independent external control bus and independent control lines are used. The
data for the signal lines are stored in the D-flipflops IC2 and IC3 and brought to the 15 volt CMOS level in
the transistor arrays IC8 and IC9.
For the external control bus, the PIO data only need to be brought to the 15 volt CMOS level in IC7.
Limitation of the high frequency leakage currents
High frequency leakage currents are effectively limited in the ICC. The transformer UE1 is used for limitation.
All lines which lead to a high-frequency output socket on the ICC are directed via transformer UE1. If no
high frequency leakage currents occur, the HF current flows from the generator via the patient to the neutral
electrode and via the transformer UE1 back to the generator completely.
Therefore ideally, the current flowing away is equal to the current flowing back. The windings of the
transformer UE1 are switched in such a way that the resulting magnetic field is canceled by the current
flowing back and forth. Thus the windings of this transformer have no inductivity; the current can flow
unimpeded.
However, if high-frequency leakage currents do occur within the patient circuit, the current flowing back
and forth is generally not equal. The magnetic fields in the transformer UE1 do not cancel each other out;
140 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Motherboard
an inductivity of the coils results which limits the high-frequency leakage current with this inductive
impedance.
Monitoring the high-frequency leakage currents
As intended, the high-frequency current should only be used for cutting or coagulating tissue. To do this, it
must flow to the active electrode in a small area and with a high current density, and flow back again from
the neutral electrode over a large area and with a low current density.
However, if the body of the patient is in contact with another electrically conductive object, the current may
also take an undesirable path and, for example, cause a burn there. These undesirable currents are known as
“leakage currents”. It is therefore important to know whether such a leakage current is flowing and how
large it is.
Such leakage current cannot simply disappear, but must instead always flow back to the generator. The
largest proportion of these high-frequency leakage currents flow back to the generator via the power cable
and the grounded conductor.
Since all power lines and the grounded conductor are directed through the ring core of the coil L1, a
corresponding high frequency voltage is induced if HF leakage current is present in the coil L1, which is
rectified with diode D1, restricted with D6, D7 and smoothed in capacitor C13. For further processing, this
DC voltage is fed to the processor system via the isolation amplifier IC12.
Changeover between flowing and capacitance-grounded output
High-frequency surgical units are generally available either in “capacitance ground of the neutral electrode”
or “floating neutral electrode” connection systems, whereby no components are integrated between the
connection to the neutral electrode and chassis in the latter connection system.
Both connection systems have advantages and disadvantages.
The advantage of capacitance ground is that the feed line from the neutral electrode to the patient is grounded
at a high frequency via the capacitor and the risk of burns is reduced. However, it is a disadvantage that
impermissible low-frequency leakage currents may flow through this capacitor during cardiac operations.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
If the neutral electrode is operated as floating, on the other hand, the low-frequency leakage currents can be
kept very easily below the limit value of 10 or 50 mA during cardiac operations, but the risk of burns is
increased in this connection system since the line from the neutral electrode is about half the high frequency
voltage of the generator.
With the ICC high-frequency surgical units, the low-frequency leakage current to the patient is measured.
At the first malfunction, this must not exceed 50 mA. Once this condition is ensured, the unit is permitted
to carry the CF designation (Cardiac Floating). If the possible low-frequency leakage current is under 500
mA in the first case of malfunction, the unit is therefore not suitable for operations on the heart and has the
designation BF (Body Floating).
Initially the ICC is capacitance-grounded via capacitors C30 and C31 and the relay contact REL 2. The
advantages of capacitance ground are fully exploited. The low-frequency leakage current is measured via
the prescribed simulation R25, C28. If for any reason a low-frequency leakage current should appear, it is
then evaluated. If it exceeds the limit of 50 mA, the relay contacts REL 2 are then opened and thus a lowfrequency leakage current can no longer flow. The ICC thus fulfills the CF requirement for cardiac surgery
3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
141 / 266
Motherboard
in every situation.
The voltage occurring in the simulation is proportional to the current and is compared in the operation
amplifier IC14 functioning as a comparator to the maximum permissible value that is prescribed and
adjustable via the resistor divider R22 and TP1. The signal for switching over the relay REL 2 is present at
the BF / CF output.
Footswitch input circuit
The footswitch is operated at a DC voltage of 15 volts via a multipole line. Since the footswitch connection,
due to its length of up to several meters, can also function as a receiving antenna and absorb interferences,
an RC low-pass is connected directly to the input sockets of the ICC which severely dampens high interference
frequencies. The footswitch signals are then regenerated using the buffer IC 13.
For further processing in the processor, the output signals from IC 13 are adapted to the TTL level of the
processor. To do this, the noninverting buffer IC5 is used.
Further signals are converted in the same manner from 15 volt CMOS level to the TTL level in the buffers
IC1 and IC6.
142 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
CPU board
Slot J1
The following functions are located on the PCB:
•
The CPU with RAM and EPROM
•
The clock generator
•
The voltage supply monitor
•
The digital input and output via Parallel Input/Output modules (PIO)
•
Analog inputs via an A/D converter
•
The Chipselect generation
•
The safety interlock signal for controlling the activation signals.
As the central processing unit (CPU), the CMOS microprocessor Z84 C00 (IC1) is used together with the
EPROM 27 C 512 as the program memory (IC3) and the battery-buffered RAM 5864 as the main memory
and constant memory (IC2)
The clock pulse for operation of the computer is produced in the quartz clock generator IC16 and then processed
in the two D-flipflops IC13 to a half-frequency, counterphase clock.
In case of a breakdown of the supply voltage, the current computer data must still be “saved” and stored in the
battery-buffered RAM. All these tasks are supported by the supervisor circuit IC10 (MAX 691).
The supply voltage is monitored via the resistor voltage divider R3, R4 and the “Powerfail” input (Pin 9,
IC10). The data are buffered by a 3 volt lithium battery BT1 which is connected at Pin 1 of the IC10. The
circuit also monitors the voltage of this buffer battery. When switching on, the circuit affects a reset of the
computer system to a specific initial status and provides the monitoring and functional capability through an
integrated “watchdog” circuit.
In addition, the +5 volt supply voltage is also monitored in a separate circuit via resistor R9, diode D1, buffer
capacitor C13 and resistor R7 via the PIO IC6, Pin 27.
The digital inputs and outputs of the computer are taken care of by the Parallel Input/Output circuits (PIOs,
IC4 to IC7). The input and output ports are specified and connected by the program.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Analog dimensions, processed by the processor, move via the level adaptation (resistor network RN1, resistors
R15 to R18) and simultaneous low-pass (capacitors C16 to C19) to the 4-channel analog-digital converter
IC14, from whence the data are available to the processor.
Since all system data are present together at the databus, the system must be able to address the target modules
to which the data apply. This occurs in a processor system by means of the Chipselect lines by which very
specific modules can be addressed via the assistance of “selection signals”.
The Chipselect signals are created in the decoder IC9 from the addresses A3, A4 and A5. Depending on the
address, only one output line each is switched to logical low.
All signals from the various fingerswitches and footswitches are summarized and verified in a safety interlock
signal as to whether any impermissible overlappings or impermissible conditions are produced. If no
impermissible overlappings are determined, the safety interlock signal generates a signal which identifies the
passed on data as save. This logic is accepted by the programmable controller IC17.
3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
143 / 266
Low voltage supply
Slot J2
The following assemblies are located on the PCB:
•
Voltage regulator for +24 volts
•
Voltage regulator for +15 volts
•
Voltage regulator for +5 volts
•
Voltage regulator for –15 volts
•
Three sound generators for the acoustic signals
•
Circuit for tone selection
•
Tone output amplifier with volume control.
Voltage regulator for +24 volts
The unstabilized DC voltage, gained on the motherboard via transformer TR1 and bridge-connected rectifier
BR2, moves to the input of a switched-mode power supply unit. This consists of the integrated switching
controller IC3, the memory choke L1 and the free-wheeling diode D1 with the necessary wiring. The
output voltage is adjusted via the voltage divider R22, R23.
At the output of the switching controller, a stabilized DC voltage of +24 volts is available. The presence of
this voltage is indicated by the LED6.
This voltage is mainly used to operate the relays in the surgical unit.
Voltage regulation for +15 volts
The instable input voltage, the presence of which is indicated by LED 4, moves to the switching
controller IC 1. The circuit extensively corresponds to the +24 volt regulation, however the transformer
UE 1 is used here as the memory choke which simultaneously taps a part of the connector voltage
occurring there for the operation of the – 15 volt regulation.
The output voltage of 15 volts prescribed by the divider ratio of the resistors R30 and R31 is used to
operate the CMOS circuits and the operation amplifier. Its proper presence is signaled by the LED 2.
Voltage regulation for – 15 volts
The negative operation voltage of – 15 volts is mainly required for the negative voltage supply of the
operation amplifier. Since the capacity of this voltage source is just minimal due to the circuit, a simple
regulating circuit could be used. The principle of analog regulation is thus sufficient, and the resulting
losses are minimal.
The switched-mode voltage tapped from the switched-mode power unit for + 15 volts at transformer UE 1
is rectified through the diode D6 such that a negative DC voltage is present at the input of the analog
regulator IC10. This voltage is stabilized by the fixed voltage controller IC10 to –15 volts. The proper
presence of this voltage is indicated by the LED1.
144/ 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Low voltage supply
Slot J2
Voltage regulation for +5 volts
A controlled voltage of +5 volts is mainly required to operate the CPU, the TTL logic modules and the light
displays on the front panel. Since the capacity of this voltage source is relatively high, a switched-mode
power supply unit was used.
The circuit corresponds extensively to that of the +24 volt regulator: The instable input voltage is stabilized
to +5 volts by means of the regulator IC6. The proper presence of the output voltage is indicated by the
LED3.
From Pin 3 of the integrated switching controller IC1 of the +15 volt voltage regulation, a connection leads
to the transistor T2 of the +5 volt control. In this way it is possible to block the function of the +5 volt power
supply unit as long as the +15 volt supply is not available. This measure is used to increase the functional
security of the unit.
Tone generators for the signal tones
The tone generators are used to audibly signal all operating and danger conditions when operating the
surgical unit. To do this, three tone generators are available, the signals of which may be mixed with one
another to produce pleasant and differing tones in this way.
The timer IC4 produces the tone frequency for the first tone, which can be adjusted using the trim
potentiometer TP2 at 493 Hz.
Timer IC5 produces the tone frequency for the second tone, which can be adjusted using the trim
potentiometer TP3 at 414 Hz.
Timer IC7 produces the tone frequency for the third tone, which can be adjusted using the trim potentiometer
TP4 at 329 Hz.
The generated tone frequencies can now be switched on selectively using the analog switches on the IC8
and mixed with one another. The combination of individual tones is prescribed by the program and is
selected using the D-flipflops of the IC9 as a target memory and switched through using the analog switches
of the IC8. Via resistors R5, R7, R9, R24, R10 and R16, the tone frequencies are combined so that one
sound can result from several individual frequencies.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
The volume of the operating tones can be adjusted using a potentiometer which is connected in parallel to
resistor R11.
The volume of the alarms must not be reduced. For this reason, the reduction of amplitudes by means of the
integrated analog switch IC8, Pin 10-11, which is also controlled by the CPU, can be passed by so that the
tone signal in this case is reproduced with the maximum amplitude at the tone output amplifier IC 2.
The R37, C9, C10, C11, R39 network is used for sound shaping, so that a pleasant sound results in the
loudspeaker which follows the tone amplifier.
3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
145 / 266
Control board
Slot J3
The following assemblies are found on the PCB:
•
Measured value acquisition and adjustment
•
The contact monitor
•
Actuation and power setting of the ST output stage
•
Actuation of the power module
•
Synchronization of the QK output stage
•
Hardware electronic safety circuits
•
Spark control
•
Actuation of the QK output stage.
Measured value acquisition and adjustment
The measurement signals, which are triggered mainly to the Senso-board as well as to other parts of the
entire unit, move first to the control board where they usually must still be adjusted in order to finally move
on to the processor.
For most inputs, an input circuit consists of a variable voltage divider with which the signal voltages can be adjusted.
Various signal voltages, the values of which are needed very quickly by the processor system, proceed via
the amplifiers IC1 and IC2 directly to the processor. (See diagram page 2/3).
Other signals which are not required for fast processing can be fed to the processor system in multiplex
operation. (Circuit diagram page 3/3). These signals are fed to the 16-channel multiplex IC 3, scanned in
chronological order, then amplified in the operation amplifier IC1 and only then fed one after another to the
processor system (output ANALOG 4).
The individual operating voltages, for example, are determined in this way:
The +15 volt operating voltage is fed via the resistor divider R39, R40 to the multiplexer.
The +24 volt operating voltage is fed via the resistor divider R41, R42 to the multiplexer.
The –15 volt operating voltage is first fed via R31 to the operation amplifier IC2 by inverting it. Now the
voltage can also be processed as a positive parameter via the multiplexer which only switches through
positive signals.
The multiplexer IC3 receives its address actuation A0 to A3 from the control bus via the target memory (Dflipflop) IC19.
The contact monitor
In the bipolar operating mode, it is necessary that the generator be switched on via the forceps when
biological tissue is found between the forceps tips. This is the purpose of the contact monitor. It should
switch on the generator at a tissue impedance of 2.5 kOhm.
In principle, two starting points can be specified and adjusted. The appropriate valid area is prescribed by
the control bus, stored in target memory IC20 and switched through there according to the activated output
(BER_1 or BER_2).
146 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Control board
Slot J3
For example, if area 1 is activated, the emitter from transistor T2 is set high and gives its output voltage via
the trim potentiometer TP 11, resistor R45 and diode D2 to the measurement line U_NETZT, which also
leads at the power module to the sensor line of the switched-mode power supply's output voltage, but at the
same time also to the measurement system of the processor (trim potentiometer TP1 on the control board).
Transistor T2 can therefore be regarded as an extra-low voltage power supply, the output voltage of which
the HF generator of the power module uses to produce a minimal HF voltage and emit this as a test voltage
to the bipolar socket.
The internal impedance of this mini power supply unit is adjusted via the trim potentiometer TP11.
If the generator is now loaded with the tissue in the forceps (or with a 2.5 kOhm impedance), the supply
voltage at the internal impedance of the mini power supply unit collapses by a specific amount.
This voltage collapse is measured by the processor system and compared with the prescribed set values. If
they agree, the main power supply unit is switched on and the HF generator supplies the preset power.
The mini power supply unit cannot be fed in reverse due to the diode D2 (protective diode).
Since the internal impedance can be changed via the trim potentiometer TP11, the starting point of the
contact monitor can be adjusted here relative to the loaded impedance of the generator (tissue impendance).
Actuation and power setting of the ST output stage
The instruction to actuate the ST output stage arrives as a digital word from the control bus. From this, in
the digital-analog converter IC8, a DC voltage results which is transformed into a specific frequency in the
voltage frequency converter IC15, which can be adjusted using the trim potentiometer TP17.
The clock pulse generated in this way is the repetition frequency of the ST output stage actuation.
The pulse length of each individual actuation pulse is taken from the repetition frequency. Using the EXOR
of the IC12, a monoflop is realized with which the pulse length of the actuation pulse can be adjusted using
the trim potentiometer TP16. After a steepening of the edge, the actuation pulse TSI_STE is available at
output 11 of the EXOR IC12.
The generator power can be adjusted via the repetition frequency.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Actuation of the power module
The power generator of the power module is a feedback generator in principle which receives its actuation
pulse from the control board. The generator, however, does not begin to oscillate itself, but must instead be
started by a pulse.
The circuit receives the start-up signal and thus the necessary starting pulse from the processor via its PIO
on the CPU board and the transistor array IC8 on the motherboard.
The HF_EIN signal is directed to the comparator IC14 on the control board, the output of which remains at
logical HIGH during activation.
When starting up, the ascending signal is differentiated via the RC element R19, C73 and moves to the gate
of the transistor T4 which then briefly connects through and triggers the monoflop IC16. This is the starting
pulse at which the generator begins to operate. Using the trim potentiometer TP15, the pulse length of the
first monoflop in the IC16 can be set and resulting in a symmetrical sine-wave characteristic for the generator
signal (adaptation to the parallel oscillating circuit).
3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
147 / 266
Control board
Slot J3
The resetting of the first monoflop IC16 triggers a secondary pulse in the second monoflop IC16 which
represents the true actuation pulse for the output stage driver. The length of this actuation pulse is adjustable
using the trim potentiometer TP14.
The power module generator is therefore always only initiated at the start of a half oscillation through the
actuation pulse. Due to the oscillating circuit as load resistance, the oscillation is extended into a complete
sine wave.
For all further oscillations during an activation phase, the generator is fed back via the resulting sinus
signal. A part of the output voltage U_PRIM of the parallel circuit is directed to the comparator IC14, the
output pulses of which now trigger the monoflops IC16.
The power module generator therefore continues to oscillate as a feedback generator until the activation
signal HF_EIN is reaccepted by the processor.
In this way, it is ensured that the generator always oscillates exactly at the resonance frequency of the
oscillating circuit and the operating frequency need not be manually adapted to the production-related
tolerances of the oscillating circuit elements.
Synchronization of the QK output stage
The quasi-complementary output stage operates at a serial oscillating circuit (on the power module) to
produce the required sine-wave current. This serial circuit affects the current in the QK output stage like a
flywheel and forces the temporal characteristic of the current to a certain extent.
Due to the improved efficiency and to protect the QK output stage, the transistors should always be switched
over at the same time that the current in the serial circuit has just made a zero crossing. This then reduces
the losses in the transistors.
This requirement can best be met according to the principle of feedback. Such a circuit principle has
already been realized in the actuation of the power module. There too, the advantages of digital control
signals with their low electrical power consumption and its versatility could be combined with the feedback
for a generator of high efficiency.
The generator cannot start by itself; it needs a starting circuit. The digital oscillator IC18 is a free-wheeling
oscillator, the frequency of which should be as close as possible to the frequency of the serial circuit. Its
output signal is directed to the priority encoder IC11. As long as no current flows in the QK output stage,
the measurement signal of the current U_IHP is zero (measurement point MP1). The comparator IC9
detects no current at input 9, therefore its output signal is low and the monoflop IC13 produces no pulses.
Its output is then continuously low and thus also the selector S1 of the priority encoder IC11. As a result,
the inputs IA2 and IA3 are switched through to the output. In this way, the signal for the starting circui IC18
or actuating the QK output stage is switched at the start.
Once the QK output stage has “started up”, a current is produced there which, at sufficient level, exceeds
the threshold of the comparator IC9, Pin 10. Since the current in the QK output stage is half-wave-shaped,
a pulse results at the output of the comparator with the frequency of the QK output stage. This pulse
triggers the monoflop IC13 at input 4. The ON time has been selected somewhat longer than the period
length of the HF signal of the QK output stage, so that the monoflop does not drop out as long as pulses
from the generated HF retrigger this monoflop (principle of the watchdog circuit). The monoflop increases
the selector input of the priority encoder IC11 to high-level. In this way, the signal from the start generator
148 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Control board
Slot J3
is no longer switched through for actuation of the QK output stage, but instead the output signal of the
comparator IC9, PIN 12.
This comparator detects the zero crossings of the high frequency current of the QK output stage and provides
a pulse at the rate of the HF at the priority encoder which switches this rate through to the actuation with
sufficient current flow of the output stage. In this way, the actuation has now been switched over from freewheeling by means of the start generator in a no-load case to feedback current control in a load case.
Hardware electronic safety circuits
The current from the QK output stage is measured one more time:
First the measurement voltage is divided by means of the divider R57, R61, then rectified using diode D10
and an average is generated using the time constants from the resistor R50 and the capacitor C10. As a
result, the comparison voltage from the divider is present at the input of the comparator IC4, on the one
hand, and on the other, the average of a voltage which corresponds to the average current of the output
stage. If the average output stage current exceeds the set threshold, the comparator tilts. Its output signal
blocks actuation of the output stage via the AND gate IC7, Pin 4, and the QK output stage is blocked for a
specific minimum time prescribed by the monoflop IC10, part 2. In this way, the circuit is provided with a
recovery time and a pump effect is avoided.
This is therefore an electronic fuse for the QK output stage.
In a similar manner, further measurement dimensions are monitored not only through software, but also
through hardware:
Voltage and current of the patient circuit are directed via their parameters UP_HF and IP_HF from the
Senso-board on the comparator IC6. This also applies to the voltage from the power supply unit U_NETZT
and its current U_INT from the power module.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
The integrated module IC6 is a comparator, the threshold voltage of which can be preset as a digital word
via the control bus. In this way, the threshold voltage can be adapted to current requirements prescribed by
the processor. The comparator compares the analog instantaneous values with those limit values set by the
processor and passes its Yes/No decisions on to the NOR circuit IC5. There the signals are summarized and
directed to gate IC7. If one single parameter has exceeded its limit value, the QK output stage actuation is
blocked by the AND circuit IC7. At the same time, the monoflop IC10, Part 1, is triggered, maintaining the
blockade for a specific minimum time, so that a pump effect caused by switching off and back on again too
quickly is avoided.
Via the second part of the AND circuit IC7, further important enable signals are controlled for the QK
output stage:
•
Is there an enable signal from the processor?
•
Is the safety interlock signal giving its enable?
•
Is there currently no reset of the processor?
If any of these questions can be answered with NO, the QK output stage is blocked.
The spark control
Several ICC units offer both a control of the HF output voltage as well as optionally a control of the
3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
149 / 266
Control board
Slot J3
sparking which occurs during the cutting and coagulation process at the active electrode. Both control
principles have concrete applications.
The control of spark intensity can be activated via the “HIGH CUT” key.
On the Senso-board, the DC voltage U_FUNKE occurring during a spark is gathered via an isolation
amplifier (description there) and directed to the control-board.
The required set value of the spark intensity is transmitted via the control bus to the digital analog converter
IC8. Its analog output signal is combined and compared at the comparator IC4 with the actual value of the
spark U_FUNKE. If the actual value is greater than the set value, output 12 tilts to frame potential and
illuminates the red LED D1. In addition, the output signal moves to the input Pin 2 of the NOR circuit IC5.
The gate IC7 with the monoflop IC10 switches off the QK output stage for a minimum period of time. In
this way, the supply voltage for the HF generator is reduced and therefore also the intensity of the spark.
Actuation of the QK output stage
The MOS field effect transistors of the quasi-complementary output stage require brief start or stop pulses
for their actuation during the zero crossing of the sinusoidal output current.
As is known from the section “Synchronization of the QK output stage”, there is a pulse at the output of the
priority encoder IC11 which is already synchronous to the zero crossings of the output current. This pulse
must now be prepared in such a way that a start or stop pulse is produced for each of the two output stage
transistors at the right point in time respectively.
If one assumes that neither of the two QK transistors are switched conductively after a pause, Transistor A
first requires a start pulse. The transistor then switches on and produces a sinusoidal half-wave within the
oscillating circuit of the QK output. At the end of this half-wave, this Transistor A must be switched back
off using a brief pulse. Then Transistor B should take over the second half-wave and be conductive. Therefore
Transistor B requires its short start pulse after Transistor A has switched off. It remains conductive until the
zero crossing of the second half-wave and must be shut off again at its end using a pulse.
In this way, a complete sine-wave oscillation has resulted and the process repeats itself constantly until the
QK output stage is switched off.
The output of the circuit IC11 produces a pulse with every zero crossing on the sinus current. However, the
actuation requires, as described, two pulses during a half-wave, specifically a start and a stop pulse. It is
therefore necessary to double the frequency of the available pulse. This occurs in the EXOR gate IC12
together with the RC low-pass R67, C15. Using this low pass, the signal at input 1 of gate IC12 is slightly
delayed compared to input 2, which leads to an output pulse with the length of the delay time for every
change in the input signal. The input frequency is thus doubled. The resulting pulses are extremely short.
By means of small, though non-negligible running times in the circuit, the signal received in the meantime
is no longer completely synchronous to the current zero crossings of the output signal. Using the monoflop
IC13, the correct phase relationship of the actuation pulses to the output current can be re-established by
specifically extending the pulses. The necessary delay time can be adjusted using the trim potentiometer
TP13.
By halving the previously double frequency in D-flipflop IC21, Part 2, the original operating frequency of
the QK output stage is recreated with a pulse duty factor of 1:1. Output pin 13 has a HIGH level, while
Transistor A is addressed. The inverted output 12 has a HIGH level, while Transistor B of the QK output
150 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Control board
Slot J3
stage is addressed. The output signals A and B thus serve in the selection of currently active transistors.
From the previously doubled frequency, the short start and stop pulses are produced for the respectively
active transistor.
The first part of the monoflop IC17 produces the start pulse, the second part the stop pulse.
The first part of the D-flipflop IC21 is additionally actuated by an ON_OFF signal for the safety circuits. In
this way, all start pulses can be suppressed on the one hand, while on the other, it is ensured that the
transistors can still be shut off in any case.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
The arrangement of selection pulses for the individual transistors with the on/off pulses is made in the
NAND gate IC1 on the QK output stage.
3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
151 / 266
QC power stage
Slot J4
The QC output stage (30128- 528)
The following functions are located on the PCB:
•
Decoding of the switch signals
•
Power-on time-delay circuit
•
Preamplifier, driver and electrical isolation of actuation
•
Clamping circuit
•
Push-pull output stage.
The output stage acts as a power amplifier for high-frequency signals, as is required, for example, in switchedmode power supply units and high-frequency surgical units. This output stage is designed for push-pull
operation on account of the greater efficiency and larger possible output power. As there are frequently
problems in procuring and storing identical P and N channel transistors - which are required for a push-pull
output stage - it is advantageous to be able to use two transistors of the same type. This circuit is then called
a quasi complementary output stage, or QC output stage for short.
The aim of the development was to produce an output stage with the highest possible efficiency and a
sinusoidal output signal with the smallest possible proportion of harmonic frequencies. Actuation should
require as low a power as possible and preferably be possible in digital mode so that the transistors can be
used in switching operation with low power loss.
All the stated requirements led to the present circuit.
Circuit principle
The complementary output stage consists of two N channel MOS-FET transistors, T1 and T2, which are
operated alternately as switches. The amplified digital output signal is present at the source of transistor T1
and simultaneously at the drain of transistor T2, since these connections are conductively connected to each
other. However, since a sinusoidal output signal is a required condition, the output of the output stage is
switched to an oscillating circuit (which is located on the next PCB).
The QC output stage is actuated between the gate and source of the respective transistor, which always
leads to electric potential problems with this circuit logic, since the actuation signal has to be superimposed
on the output signal.
This problem can be solved by actuating the relevant transistor via a transformer. If this method is used for
both output stage transistors, it has the advantage that the actuation circuit can be completely isolated from
the output circuit and the high output voltages occurring in the event of a defect cannot damage the actuation
circuit.
The disadvantage, however, is that the transformer cannot transmit any DC signals.
This is where the gate-source capacitance of the MOS-FETs proves useful. Since this capacitance is of high
quality, the gate-source capacitance can maintain an applied charge for a sufficient length of time. The
clamping circuit consisting of diodes D8, D9, D10 and D5, D6, D7 has the effect that the gate-source
capacitance can be charged with a short positive pulse. This positive pulse is fed via diode D8 to the gate of
transistor T1 and charges the GS capacitance sufficiently for the transistor to be switched to a conducting
state.
152 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
QC power stage
Slot J4
This charge cannot then flow back into the actuation circuit after the actuation pulse has ended, since diode
D8 acts as a block and diode D9 also permits no reverse current due to its Z-diode characteristic. The result
is that the transistor remains in a conducting state as long as its GS capacitance has sufficient charge.
If, on the other hand, a sufficiently large negative pulse comes from the actuation circuit, the Z-diode
voltage at diode D9 is exceeded and the GS capacitance can be discharged again. Transistor T1 thereby acts
as a block.
It can thus be seen that a MOS-FET transistor can be operated in switching mode via such a clamping
circuit by means of a pulse transformer with short start and stop pulses.
Capacitors C4 and C5 are connected in parallel to the GS capacitance and support the effect described.
Since their capacitance is significantly higher than the corresponding gate-source capacitances, the circuit
becomes largely independent of parameter scatter of the gate-source capacitances of different production
batches.
It is the task of actuation to time the actuation process in such a way that each of the two power transistors
receives a short start pulse and, after a defined pause, a stop pulse at the right time. It must be ensured that
the two transistors are never switched to a conducting state simultaneously, since a short circuit of the
supply voltage would result!
Circuit description
The actuation signals are generated on the control board (30128-357). These signals are short pulses for
starting and stopping the output stage transistors and two additional pulses, one for selecting the upper
output stage transistor and the other for selecting the lower output stage transistor.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
These pulses come via connector J1 to the NAND gates ½ IC1 and IC4 on the QC board. There the "Start"
and "Transistor A" pulses, for example, are brought together (as are "Stop" and "Transistor A"). The following
pulse sequences are thus present at the outputs of IC 1:
•
Start transistor A
•
Stop transistor A
•
Start transistor B
•
Stop transistor B.
These pulses are each preamplified in the triply parallel gates of the NOR circuits IC 2 and IC3. The outputs
of IC2 and IC3 actuate the driver stages, each consisting of two parallel transistors T3 to T10. The output
signal of the four parallel drivers is then amplified to such a level that the pulse transformers UE1 and UE2
can be operated with sufficient energy.
In the case of a complementary output stage, it must be strictly ensured that the two output stage transistors
are not simultaneously in the activated state, as this would cause a short circuit across the two transistors
and damage the output stage beyond repair.
Therefore, the stop pulses generally have the highest priority. They ensure a safe state of the output stage
during undefined operation. The start pulses are separated in the actuation logic to ensure that only one
output stage transistor is actuated at any one time.
An undefined state could, however, occur in rare cases if the +15 V operating voltage is too low at any point
3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
153 / 266
QC power stage
Slot J4
in time. For this possibility, in which the logic might operate undefined, a "Power-on time-delay circuit"
avoids undefined starting of the output stage transistor.
With transistor T11, the supply voltage VDD = + 15 V is monitored. If this voltage is missing, capacitor C10
is quickly discharged via diode D12. This logical LO signal is sent to the two NAND gates ½ IC 1 and
blocks the starting pulses. If the supply voltage is present, capacitor C10 is charged to 15 V via transistor
T11 and resistor R8 in a predefined delay time. This HI signal reaches the two NAND gates again (see
above) and enables the start pulses for the output stage.
On the secondary side of the driver transformers, short, steep spikes occur, initially a positive pulse for
starting, then a negative pulse for stopping the corresponding output stage transistor.
These spikes reach the gates of the MOS-FET transistors via the clamping circuit described above, and
switch the gates.
The amplified output signal is tapped at the two mutual connection points of the transistors.
154 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Power module
Slot J5
Power module UL
Slot J5
The following assemblies are found on the PCB:
•
Serial oscillating circuit for the QC power stage
•
Generation of the operating voltage for the HF generator
•
Driver and output stage of the HF generator
•
Output circuit of the HF generator
•
Measurement of various operating parameters
Serial oscillating circuit for the QC power stage
The QC power stage has the task of generating a sine-wave current as free of distortion as possible. The QC
power stage is not used in the ICC to generate high-frequency power for cutting or coagulating, but instead
functions here as a switched-mode power supply unit with a high switching frequency and efficiency. The
QC transistors are always switched over in the zero crossing of the current. The current is forced at the
same time through the serial circuit from coil L2 and capacitor C17 into a sinusoidal shape.
Generation of the operating voltage of the HF generator
The high-frequency power is tapped via the transformer UE2 and rectified by means of the diodes D3, D4.
The capacitors C4, C10 are filter capacitors. With 22 µF, they can be measured relatively minimally and the
ripple of the output voltage is nevertheless small due to the high operating frequency. In this way, this
switched-mode power supply unit can also be stabilized very quickly.
The output DC voltage of the power supply unit is available at the cathode of diode D3 and is
a)
directed via the U–NT–STE connection to supply the ST output stage,
b)
used to operate the HF output stage via relay REL1.
The negative pole of the capacitor C10 leads to the chassis via the resistor R5. R5 is used as a shunt to
measure the output current taken from this power supply unit. The voltage alloted to R5 if used for
measurement by U–INT.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
In the activation pauses, the power supply unit can be discharged via NTE (power supply enable). To do
this, the transistor T3 is switched conductively and discharges the stored power supply voltage via the
resistor R12.
The power supply output voltage is divided into smaller values via the resistor divider R7, R8 and lead to
the measuring device (U-NETZT).
Via the relay REL1, the transformer UE2 can be switched over. With an activated relay, a higher output
voltage can be taken from the transformer. This is required to operate the ST output stage to generate
especially high voltage peaks. This high voltage is switched off to protect the HF output stage by means of
the second contact from relay REL1.
3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
155 / 266
Power module
Slot J5
Power module UL
Slot J5
Driver and output stage of the HF generator
The actuation signal for the HF output stage is generated on the control board (IC16) and fed to the power
module driver IC1 via the motherboard.
Due to the high-gate source capacitance of the output stage transistors T1 and T2, the driver must be able to
emit and accept high reactive currents when transferring this capacitance. That is why two drivers are
switched in parallel. The output current of the driver is restricted by the resistors R1 and R19 to protect the
driver.
The output stage transistors T1 and T2 are switched in parallel due to the necessary high current and
operate on output transformer UE1.
Output circuit of the HF generator
The output circuit of the output stage consists of the transformer UE1 on the primary side and the two
capacitors C5 and C7 switched in parallel. This parallel circuit is designed for the operating frequency of
the HF generator and forms a sine-wave voltage in a no-load case.
At the secondary side, there is a serial circuit made up of coil L1 and the capacitor C1. This serial circuit is
also designed for the operating frequency of the HF generator and produces a sine-wave current in the
output circuit.
In this way, in every load state of the generator, both the voltage and the current are sinusoidal.
Measurement of various operating parameters
The output current in the QC power stage flows via the transformer UE3 which is secondarily loaded with
the resistors R13, R14 and R15 and is used as a current transformer.
The voltage at these resistors corresponds to the output voltage of the QC power stage (half-cycle current)
and is routed as U-IHP to the control board.
The current in the power supply unit is measured at shunt R5 and routed as U-INT (voltage as a function of
the power supply current) to the control board.
The output voltage of the power supply unit is divided via the resistors R7, R8 and routed as U-NETZT to
the control board (IC14).
The HF primary voltage of the output stage is picked up at the oscillating circuit capacitor C5 and routed as
U-PRIM to the control board (IC14).
The output stage temperature is recorded by the thermistor NTC1 and routed as voltage from the divider
R2, NTC1 with the designation TEMP to the control board (IC2).
156 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
ST power stage
Slot J6
The following assemblies are located on the PCB:
•
Output stage with driver for high HF voltage pulses
•
Relay with relay control
•
Feedback of actuation frequency for the CPU
ST power stage
The ST power stage is used to generate high pulses for coagulation without a cutting effect, particularly for
quick superficial coagulation.
The designation “ST” output stage is derived from the abbreviation of spray generator for TUR.
The power control and the generation of actuation pulses are found on the control board.
The actuation pulses (TSI-STE) move to the driver IC4 and then to the ST output stage transistor T1. This
operates on the output transformer UE1, the secondary side of which emits the high frequency via the
capacitors C1 and C2 as well as the relays REL1, REL2 and REL3 at the connections AE and NE. The
emitted high frequency is fed to the outputs via the Senso-board.
The capacitors C1 and C2 serve as a high-pass for suppression of faradic effects and are also an additional
protection in isolating the patient circuit from the equipment circuit. Due to the necessary high electric
strength, two relay contacts each are switched in series.
The output relay is actuated via the relay driver IC7 which receives its actuation signals via the bus and the
target memory IC6 (D-flipflop).
The ST power stage is supplied with voltage that is switched with relay REL19 from the power module via
the connectors J2 and J3.
The integrated counter IC1 subdivides the frequency of the actuation signal of the ST output stage to a low
frequency, so that the frequency in the CPU can be determined by means of a counting loop.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Since the processor prescribes the actuation frequency, it receives feedback in this way as to whether the set
and actual values agree. This is important since the output power of the ST power stage is controlled via the
repetition frequency of the individual pulses.
3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
157 / 266
Senso-board
Slot J7
The following assemblies are located on the PCB:
•
Current monitor for the patient circuit
•
Voltage monitor for the patient circuit
•
Phase monitor for the patient circuit
•
Spark monitor for monitoring the sparking at the electrodes
•
Safety system for the neutral electrode (NESSY)
•
Relay control
Current monitor for the patient circuit
The high-frequency current moves from the generator to the Senso-board via the connectors J1 and J2. On
the way to the electrodes, the current is directed by the transformer UE1, the load resistors R11 and R12 of
which are transformed at a ratio of 2500:1 to the primary side and thus serve as a shunt for current
measurement.
The output voltage of the secondary winding is also proportionate to the high-frequency output current.
This voltage now moves to one of the operation amplifiers IC7 and IC8, which represent an »ideal rectifier«
together with the diodes D27, the capacitor C30 feedback resistor R30.
The rectified voltage IP_PAT is lead via the control board to the processor and, after further amplification
in the operation amplifier IC8, is also lead as voltage IP_PAT A for adjustment at the trim potentiometer
TP6 also to the processor.
The output voltage of the transformer UE1, on the other hand, moves after a restriction through the diodes
D16, D17 to the comparator IC3, the open collector of which operates at the resistor R23. There the zero
crossings of the HF current are detected, together with the second part of the comparator IC3, at the output
of which a signal according to the zero crossing of the HF voltage is present. Using the common load
resistor R23, this circuit represents a “WIRED OR”. There is a digital signal at the output the pulse length
of which corresponds to the phase relationship between voltage and current of the HF signal.
The voltage monitor for the patient circuit
Parallel to the lines which lead to the active electrode AE and the neutral electrode NE, the high-frequency
voltage is picked up and led via the capacitor C1 to the transformer UE2, which transforms the voltage by
a factor of 12.5 weakened to the secondary winding.
After a further halving of the measurement voltage in the resistor divider R15, R16, it moves, similar to the
situation in a current monitor, to an active, ideal rectifier, consisting of the operation amplifiers IC4, IC8 as
well as the diode D23, the capacitor C33 and the negative feedback resistor R52. The parameter for the
high-frequency patient voltage UP_HF is then led to the processor via the control board, as is also the
amplified signal UP_HF A.
At the same time, the output voltage of the transformer UE2 is directed to the comparator IC3 which emits
a digital signal to the “WIRED OR” during its positive phase. (See above for description).
158 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Senso-board
Slot J7
Phase monitor for the patient circuit
The phase monitor determines the phase angle between the voltage and current in a high-frequency patient
circuit. In this way not only the apparent power, but also the active power emitted to the patient can be
calculated.
As already described in the current monitor and voltage monitor sections, the zero crossings of the voltage
and current characteristics are evaluated in the comparators of the open collector operation amplifier IC3
and summarized as “WIRED OR” in the load resistor R23. There is therefore a digital signal at the output
7 of the IC3, the pulse length of which corresponds to the phase relationship between the current and
voltage.
This signal is smoothed using the diodes D20 and D21, the resistor R40 and the capacitor C13 (averaging),
then amplified and decoupled via the operation amplifier IC9.
The voltage U_PHASE corresponding to the phase between the HF current and HF voltage is directed to
the control board and can be adjusted there using the trim potentiometer TP 7. The result is fed to the
processor.
The spark monitor for monitoring the spark cycle at the electrodes
During the cutting process, for example, there is sparking at the active electrode. To maintain a consistant
quality for the cut, the spark must be recorded and controlled in its intensity.
Our generators produce sine-wave output voltages with a very low distortion factor. If a spark occurs in a
patient circuit, harmonic frequencies of the output signal are thus produced by the nonlinear characteristic
of the spark channel. Harmonics can be either harmonics or DC voltage. This is why one can also say
“rectifier effect of the spark”.
The DC voltage resulting in this way moves from the patient circuit to the spark monitor of the ICC. It
moves via the resistors R1, R2, R4 and R5 to the Z-diodes D1 and D2, switched antiserially, which limit the
signal to 15 volts. Then follows the operation amplifier IC2, switched as an isolation amplifier, which
makes the DC voltage signal durable.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
The DC voltage proportional to the spark intensity in the patient circuit must now be evaluated by the unit
and fed isolated to the unit circuit. The remainder of the circuit is in principle an isolation amplifier: DC
voltage signal is chopped, fed isolated via a transformer to the unit circuit and then rectified again.
The oscillator module IC1 produces a square-wave signal with a pulse duty factor of 1:1, present at outputs
10 and 11 of the IC1. This is the chopper frequency which actuates the transistor T1 and T2 in push-pull
operation. This push-pull amplifier functions on the output transformer UE5, which is operated via the
isolation amplifier IC1 using the spark voltage as the operating voltage.
In this way, the spark voltage is chopped from the transistors T1,T2 and fed via the transformer UE5 as an
isolation at the secondary side to the unit circuit as AC voltage.
Diode D15 then follows on the secondary side, which again rectifies the alternating signal thus resulting
and smoothes this by means of the capacitor C22.
3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
159 / 266
Senso-board
Slot J7
In this way there is another DC voltage, proportional to the spark intensity, which is reduced via the resistor
divider R32, R33 and then fed to the isolation amplifier IC9. The output signal U_FUNKE moves from
there via the control board to control the processor.
The electronic components of this isolation amplifier within the patient circuit require an isolated voltage
supply to function. For this, a DC/DC converter is used which consists of a Colpitts oscillator (circuit
around Transistor T6), the alternating signal of which is transferred from the transformer UE6 to the secondary
side and rectified by diodes D4 and D6. The DC voltages thus resulting are limited to 9.1 volts by the Zdiodes D3 and D5 respectively.
In this way, voltages of +9.1 volts and –9,1 volts are available to the electronic circuit within the patient
circuit which is identified with I+9 and I–9.
Safety system for the neutral electrode (NESSY)
Problem description: The line for the neutral electrode must be monitored for wire break according to the
standard since there is risk of topical burns for the patient with an incorrect supply line.
In the ICC, correct application of the neutral electrode on the patient is also checked, as well as the uniform
distribution of the HF current to the two electrode surfaces (symmetry).
To monitor the connecting line, the cable is designed as a two-wire connection, the loop resistance of which
is measured. If the resistance value determined in this way is below a specific limit value, one can assume
that the neutral electrode line has no wire break. With conventional single-surface neutral electrodes,
monitoring is performed in this way.
However, such monitoring cannot determine whether the neutral electrode is actually applied to the patient
or whether it is lying around somewhere else.
To also check the correct application to the patient, the contacts of the neutral electrode must be divided,
whereby a control current must flow over the electrode halves and the patient. This control current permits
resistance measurement of the tissue impedance of the patient and thus information as to whether
•
the electrode is not connected or has a wire break (impedance > 120 ohms),
•
is lying directly on the operating table (impedance < 5 ohms),
•
or, most probably, is correctly applied to the patient (impedance between 5 and 120 ohms).
If the high-frequency current is not flowing regularly over both surfaces of a divided neutral electrode, this
can lead to burns due to current concentration under the electrode. It is therefore also necessary to check the
symmetrical current distribution on both halves of the electrode.
The NESSY system, a neutral electrode safety system patented by ERBE, takes care of all the tasks
mentioned.
Principle of the NESSY measurement system
The electric resistance of the neutral electrode is measured via an oscillator, the amplitude of which is
dampened by the resistance from the patient and measured by the system. With a correct circuit design, a
sufficiently precise resistance measurement is possible in this way.
160 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Senso-board
Slot J7
The symmetry of HF current on the halves of the neutral electrode is measured by a symmetrical transformer,
the output voltage of which is a function of current symmetry.
Implementation: The circuitry is found on the Senso-board. The oscillator is designed as a frequencyselective feedback amplifier: The amplifier IC6 actuates the push-pull stage, consisting of the transistors T4
and T5, and passes the amplified output signal to the frequency-selective serial circuit made of capacitor
C20, coil L1 and the inductivity from the primary side of transformer UE4.
One part of the output signal at the transformer UE4 is picked up via the resistor R18 and fed to the active
bandpass from the operation amplifier IC5 and its wiring. The center frequency is equal to the resonance
frequency of the previously mentioned serial circuit.
One part of the output signal from the active bandpass is fed again in proper phase to the amplifier IC6,
such that the entire arrangement fulfills the oscillation condition and oscillates at the resonance frequency
as an oscillator.
The oscillator can be switched off via the transistors T7 and T8 by means of the disable signal OSZI_DIS
from the processor.
The resistance of the neutral electrode is determined by loading this oscillator with the resistance to be
measured. The voltage collapses on the internal impedance of the oscillator according to the load. Thus
every oscillator voltage can be assigned an appropriate resistance value.
The oscillator voltage is present at the input of the active bandpass and can be picked up at the output of the
operation amplifier IC6.
After peak rectification by diode D30 and capacitor C34, the measurement voltage U_NESSY can be
picked up at the isolation amplifier IC9 and moves via the adjustment on the control board (trim potentiometer
TP9 ) to the processor to determine the resistance of the neutral electrode.
The high-frequency output voltage for the neutral electrode is balanced by the capacitors C2 and C3 on
both lines to the neutral electrode, i.e. divided equally.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Whether the current on both lines to the neutral electrode is now of equal size, depends on whether the two
electrode halves of the split neutral electrode are applied with the same surfaces to the patient. By measuring
the symmetry of the current and the resistance, it is therefore possible to receive information as to whether
the electrode is applied well to the patient with this entire surface.
The high-frequency current flows via the two primary windings 1 and 2 of the transformer UE3 in such a
manner that the resulting magnetic flow is cancelled out by equally strong currents. Thus in this case, no
voltage is induced at winding 3 of the transformer UE3. The reverse is true: The more unsymmetrical the
current flow is, the greater the voltage induced in winding 3.
The high-frequency output voltage, which is a measure for the unsymmetry of the current flow, is rectified
using diode D9 and filtered with capacitor C57, then amplified using the operation amplifier IC9, so that a
signal U_SYM is available which moves via the control board to the processor for evaluation.
The current density is calculated mathematically from the following dimensions, now known:
•
High-frequency current,
•
Symmetry of the high-frequency current at the neutral electrode,
•
Contact resistance of the neutral electrode to the body of the patient.
3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
161 / 266
Senso-board
Slot J7
The relay control
The relays REL1, REL2 and REL3 are used to switch on the required output sockets. The relays are controlled
by the control bus via the target memory D-flipflops IC10 and the transistors T9, T10 and T11.
162 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Relay board
Slot J8 (for ICC 300, 350)
The following assemblies are located on the PCB:
•
Fingerswitch monitor 1
•
Fingerswitch monitor 2
•
Relays and their actuation for optional, separate connection of high-frequency to the required output
sockets.
The fingerswitch monitors are used to activate the surgical unit from the surgeon's handle. The monitor can
detect which output sockets carry high frequency and which current quality (cutting or coagulating) should
be switched on.
Since the handles are within the patient current circuit electrically, the monitor circuits must be designed
isolated from the unit circuit and from the chassis.
The monitor circuits must therefore be supplied with current from a floating voltage source. These voltage
sources must however also be well isolated at high frequencies, such as are used in high-frequency surgery.
This means that monitors with their voltage sources must be designed as low capacity compared to the rest
of the unit.
The voltage supply for the monitors is realized by two push-pull converters.
The voltage converter for monitor 1 essentially consists of the transistors T1, T2 and the transformer UE 1.
The voltage converter for monitor 2 essentially consists of the transistors T5, T6 and the transformer UE 2.
The transistors of this converter are monitored via the oscillator IC 6, which supplies a symmetrical, squarewave signal, that is shortened in the monoflop IC5, in such a way that it is ensured that the two transistors
of a converter are not switched on at the same time.
The NAND circuits of the IC 4 create an appropriate push-pull signal that is directly suitable for actuation
of the converter transistors.
Since both fingerswitch monitors have identical circuits, the circuitry of only one of the two monitors is
explained in the following:
On the secondary side of the converter transformer UE 1, a needle-shaped output signal forms in the midfrequency range which is directed both to the diode bridge D1 to D5 with the transmitter diode from IC 1 as
well as via the RC low-pass C3, R2, C1, R1 on the handle's selection keys.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Due to the bridge circuit for diodes D1 to D5, the transmitter diode for optocoupler IC 1 may be illuminated
during both half-waves and connect through the receiving transistor for the optocoupler IC 1 by pulses.
If, on the other hand, a key on the handle is pressed, a voltage needle for the converter voltage is dampened
by the Si diode integrated into the handle, so that the transmitter diode for the coupler IC1 can no longer be
illuminated for the affected voltage needle and the appropriate transistor is no longer connected through at
exactly this voltage needle.
The output signal from the receiving transistor is directed to the two data inputs for the D-flipflops of the
IC3. These two D-flipflops additionally receive the actuation signals for the converter transistors, so that a
definite assignment is possible here between the dampened voltage needle and the actuation signal. The
two D-flipflops therefore function as a scanning circuit in proper phase, the output signal of which can be
assigned to the switched key in the handle.
3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
163 / 266
Relay board
Slot J8 (for ICC 300, 350)
Since a diode is switched in series for each of the two pushbuttons on the handle, although both diodes have
a definite and opposite polarity, this circuitry can be detected exactly via the dampened half-wave after
pressing a pushbutton, as to whether and which button was activated. Outputs 2 or 12 on the IC3 therefore
provide reliable information as to whether the “cutting ” or “coagulating” key was pressed. The information
that no key was pressed is just as possible as the information that both keys were pressed simultaneously.
Isolation of the fingerswitch monitor is complete via the transformer UE1 and via the optocoupler IC1.
The function of the second fingerswitch monitor is equivalent.
The two relays REL 1 and REL 2 are also found on the same PCB which safely separate the two output
sockets for the active electrodes from the generator circuit when the unit is not activated, while connecting
only the activated output socket to the generator when the unit is activated.
Due to the higher electrical strength that can be achieved, two relay contacts are switched in series.
The two relays are activated from the CPU via the target memory D-flipflops IC8 and the transistors T3,
T4.
164 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Display board
The following assemblies are found on the PCB:
•
7-segment displays and their actuation
•
Keyboard and LED matrix for light fields
•
Operating board bus and keyboard treatment
•
Target memory and driver for rows and columns of the display matrix
•
Jumpers for activation of special software
7-segment displays and their actuation
All settings on the ICC are, insofar as this concerns numerical values, shown on the display board with 7segment displays.
The data to be displayed come from the operating board bus system B1BUS via the target memory (8-fold
D-flipflops) IC5 and IC7 on the segment driver IC6. This results in the bus for the segment actuation
identified as S1BUS.
The segment bus S1BUS controls the series resistors necessary for current limitation in the LEDs the
segments A to F and decimal point DP for the displays LED1 and LED2.
The columns are selected by the target memory IC5 via column driver transistors, which are depicted in the
circuit diagram each directly over the 7-segment displays.
In this way, every individual segment within the matrix is addressable via the column selection and the
segment control.
Keyboard and LED matrix for light fields
All keys for entering operating parameters are designed as membrane buttons and switched electrically in
the form of a matrix with columns and rows.
In addition, all visual displays with the exception of numerical displays are designed in the form of LED
displays or LED fields which are electrically switched as a matrix.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Operating board bus and keyboard treatment
To control the operating and display board, an independent bus system is required that is derived from the
address bus (A0 to A7). To do this, the addresses A0 to A7 are inverted in the transistor array IC12 and
through the transistor T21 and forming the operating board bus B1BUS, which now addresses the target
memory of the display board in conjunction with the corresponding independent chipselect signal from the
inverter IC8 and the required assemblies.
The rows of the keyboard are multiplexed via the target memory IC1; this produces the row actuation
pulses TZ1 to TZ4 (keyboard row).
If a specific key is now activated, this sends its answer during its activation time via the row actuation pulse
as an output signal via a line for the keyboard columns TS2 to TS3 to the keyboard encoder IC11, which
forms a 4 bit binary number from this and directs it via its output to the CPU for evaluation.
3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
165 / 266
Display board
Target memory and drivers for rows and columns of the display matrix
The LED matrix is actuated by the already described internal bus system B1BUS of the display board.
The 8-fold D-flipflops IC2, IC3 and IC12 are used as target memories for columns (IC2) and rows (IC3).
The columns of the lamp matrix LS1 to LS6 are activated via the driver transistors T2, T20, T11, T10, T4
and T9 switched as emitter followers in a multiplex method and each switched for a brief time to +5 volts.
The current is then led via the appropriate LED and directed via the necessary current limitation resistors as
well as the transistor array IC4 to chassis.
The blue LEDs D36 and D37 for display of the coagulation channels are an exception, the anodes of which
are permanently at +5 volts via the current limitation resistors and are switched on via the transistor array
IC13.
Jumpers for activation of special software
Jumpers J3 to J10 are intended for software specialities available for tests and for switching on special
features in certain countries. The corresponding jumpers are already placed during production and must not
be changed arbitrarily.
166 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Upper wiring module
The “upper wiring module” PCB directs the rectified supply voltage from the motherboard via the plug J14
as a supply voltage to the QC power stage. In addition, this PCB is used as a connection between the QC
power stage and the power module, since currents of this dimension cannot be directed via the motherboard.
The lines between the QC power stage and the motherboard are directed through a ferrite core to reduce
interferences from the QC power stage into the network.
CAUTION
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
This PCB is at supply voltage potential
3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
167 / 266
Chapter 4
Block diagrams
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Art.-Nr. 80116-200
09 / 2004
ICC 200
BLOCKDIAGRAMME
Blockdiagramm
4
V 2.0 / V 4.0
169 / 264
ICC 300
Blockdiagramm
170 / 264
V 2.0 / V 4.0
4
BLOCKDIAGRAMME
Art.-Nr. 80116-200
09 / 2004
ICC 350
BLOCKDIAGRAMME
Blockdiagramm
4
V 2.0 / V 4.0
171 / 264
Chapter 5
Circuit diagrams
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
PCBs for
ICC 200, 300, 350
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
DBUS
68nF
68nF
C10
68nF
C9
68nF
C8
68nF
C7
68nF
C6
68nF
C5
68nF
C4
C1
68nF
C2
68nF
C3
A13
VNOT
A0-A15
M1
IORQ
+24V
Vcc
+5V
VNOT
C11
Vcc
+5V
Vcc
+5V
Vcc
+5V
21 RD
22 WR
RD
Vcc
+5V
Vcc
+5V
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
19 MREQ
20 IORQ
MREQ
GND
IC2
IC1
27 M1
WR
R14
28 RFSH
9
7
3V
+
R1
2k2
1
GND
5k6
5k6
R13
R6
5k6
24 WAIT
15
5k6
RES
16
RES
16 INT
17 NMI
INT
10
C15
14
WDI
11
OSC
CE OUT 12
LOW LINE 6
OSC SEL
GND 4
MAX691
GND
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
31
10
A0-A15
32
33
9
34
8
35
7
36
6
37
5
38
4
39
3
40
25
1
24
2
21
3
23
4
2
5
IC3
D0-D7
N.C.
VCC
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
5864
A0-A15
11
12
8
13
7
15
6
16
VNOT
5
17
4
18
3
JP1
19
25
24
21
CE1
CE2
OE
R/W
20
CE_OUT
23
26
2
22
26
27
27
1
6
CLK
Z84C00
DMUX
A13
1
A14
2
A15
Vcc
+5V
D0-D7
GND
GND
3
0
G
2
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
7
&
6
4
5
5
CLK
1
4
G
EN
OUT
5
3
2
SG531P
1
IC13
10
S
C
D
R
5
11
12
6
R20
Vcc
+5V
IC13
13
S
C
D
R
220R
Vcc
+5V
IC16
9
8
74HC74
74HC74
11
RES
R
13
15
16
17
18
19
CE 20
OE 22
6
&
74HC00
13
12
11
10
IC15
9
CE_IN
4
7
5
IC15
2
Q1
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
Q9
Q10
Q11
Q12
Q13
Q14
&
6
74HC00
1
IC12
10
D0-D7
12
14
74HC138
SIO-CLK
CLK
11
4
15
PIC-CLK
R21
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
IC11
Vcc
+5V
IC8
D4 7
D5 9
D6 10
D7 13
CLK
220R
A0
A1
A3
A2
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
WR
D2 12
D3 8
MREQ
Vcc
+5V
10
9
D0 14
D1 15
CE_OUT
GND
28
27C512
Vcc
+5V 25
BUSREQ
23 BUSACK
CE_IN
1
26 RESET
RES
10nF
13
D2
GND
5k6
R10
R5
5
1k
R4
8
PF1
18 HALT
WAIT
2
VNOT
BAT ON
RES
RES
PFD
WD0
WD1
CE IN
VCC
VBAT
5k6
1N4148
3
BT1
R12
IC10
5k6
R11
68nF
8k2
R3
GND
A14
30
&
3
9
IC9
7
5
4
6
DMUX
A3
1
A4
2
A5
3
13
12
15
0
G
2
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
7
&
4
GND
R19
1
2
6
M1
14
74HC00
5
J2/7C
IORQ
220R
15
CS4
14
CS5
13
CS6
12
CS7
11
CS8
10
CS9
9
CS10
7
CS11
74HC138
3
74HC4020
5
Vcc
+5V
Vcc
+5V IC15
IC11
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
2
Vcc
+5V IC15
9
1
&
3
74HC00
B
12
10
&
8
74HC00
13
&
Datum
Name
Gezeich. 29.07.92 M.Fritz
11
Gepr ft
74HC00
LP bs.: 30128-052
nderung
Datum
Name
Blatt
Gert/UNIT
ICC
Benennung/Title
LP un.: 40128-026
Nr.
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
1 von 3
CPU
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
30128-052
ICC 200, 300, 350
ABUS
CPU PCB
30128-052
178 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Vcc
+5V
IC5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
IC4
D0-D7
19
D0
D1
D2
40
D3
39
D4
38
D5
3
D6
2
D7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
20
1
A0
6
A1
5
IORQ
35
RD
25
CLK
Vcc
+5V
B/A SEL
C/D SEL
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
CE
37
M1
36
IORQ
M1_PIO
J1/13
13
J1/14
12
J1/15
20
1
40
39
J1/16
9
J1/17
8
J1/18
7
J1/19
38
3
2
ARDY 18
ASTB 16
4
CS4
J1/12
14
10
RD
CLK
27
J1/11
28
J1/10
29
J1/9
30
J1/8
INT
24
IEI
22
IEO
IEI_5
5
32
J2/7C
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B/A SEL
C/D SEL
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
35
25
CLK
RD
CLK
J2/6C
BRDY
BSTB 17
J1/28
14
J1/29
20
13
J1/30
1
12
INT
24
IEI
22
IEO
IEI_5
IEI_6
D0-D7
J1/31
40
10
J1/32
39
9
J1/33
38
8
J1/34
3
7
J1/35
2
27
J1/27
28
J1/26
29
J1/25
30
J1/24
31
PIC-RTCC
32
J1/22
33
A0
6
A1
5
34
J2/8C
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
M1_PIO
IORQ
35
RD
25
CLK
RD
CLK
J2/20C
14
SICHER
20
13
J2/19C
1
12
FISCH-B1
D0-D7
10
J2/18C
9
FISCH-A1
8
FISCH-A3
7
FUSS-B2
27
28
IEI_6
IEI_7
6
A1
5
FUSS-A1
30
FISCH-A2
M1_PIO
FUSS-B1
32
FISCH-B2
33
FUSS-A2
34
FISCH-B3
35
RD
25
CLK
B/A SEL
C/D SEL
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
RD
CLK
INT
24
IEI
22
IEO
IEI_7
Z80PIO
VREF-
13
R7
680k
22k
R9
+
15uF
C20
68nF
C14
J2/24C
29
J2/24A
30
J2/25C
31
J2/25A
32
J2/26C
33
J2/26A
34
J2/27C
M1
IC11
9
12
10
&
8
74HC00
13
&
11
74HC00
+
15uF
R8
5M6
C13
GND
6
Vcc
+5V
7
VREF+ 14
15
8
1k
9
RD
RDY
16
CS
AD7824
J2/6A
A
2
10
J2/23A
28
1N4148
AIN4 1
D
3
21
27
GND
8*1k
CS8
22
A1
J2/27A
GND
1
RD
WAIT
A0
J2/28C
7
GND
1k
R15
4
20
ABUS
J2/28A
8
D1
GND
J2/7A
AIN3 2
5
19
RES
1k
R16
1nF
RN1
18
AIN2
180nF
C19
17
J2/8A
3
180nF
C18
9
IC11
1k
R17
AIN1 4
C16
8
J2/29C
9
J2/9A
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
A0
A1
180nF
C17
7
J2/29A
10
Vcc
+5V
R18
6
J2/30C
12
Z80PIO
Vcc
+5V
D0-D7
J2/30A
13
BRDY 21
BSTB 17
IC14
DBUS
J2/31C
14
23
INT
BRDY 21
BSTB 17
15
ARDY 18
ASTB 16
CE
37
M1
36
IORQ
IORQ
31
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
4
CS7
29
D0
D1
D2
40
D3
39
D4
38
D5
3
D6
2
D7
A0
J2/13C
23
INT
24
IEI
22
IEO
19
15
ARDY 18
ASTB 16
B/A SEL
C/D SEL
Z80PIO
Z80PIO
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
CE
37
M1
36
IORQ
CS6
INT
BRDY 21
BSTB 17
IC7
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
4
J1/21
23
INT
21
19
15
ARDY 18
ASTB 16
CE
37
M1
36
IORQ
RD
WDI
IC6
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
4
CS5
23
INT
6
A1
IORQ
MC-FREI
34
A0
M1_PIO
31
33
19
D0-D7
15
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
B
Datum
Name
Gezeich. 29.07.92 M.Fritz
Gepr ft
LP un.: 40128-026
LP bs.: 30128-052
Nr.
nderung
Datum
Name
Blatt 2 von 3
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
Gert/UNIT
ICC
Benennung/Title
CPU
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
30128-052
M1_PIO
ICC 200, 300, 350
ABUS
DBUS
CPU PCB
30128-052
5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
179 / 266
VNOT
2k2
F-GND
J1-10
2k2
J1-9
J1-11
J1-13
J1-15
J1-17
J1-19
J1-21
8*2k2
J1/11
8
J1/12
7
10
J1/13
6
11
J1/14
5
12
J1/15
4
13
J1/16
9
3
14
J1/17
2
15
J1/18
1
16
J1-11
J1-12
J1-25
J1-13
J1-27
J1-14
J1-29
J1-15
J1-31
J1-16
J1-33
J1-17
J1-35
J1-18
F-GND
7
10
J1/22
6
11
J1/24
5
12
J1/26
J1/27
J1/28
4
13
3
14
2
15
1
16
J1/30
8
9
10
J1/31
6
11
J1/32
5
12
4
13
J1/34
3
14
J1/35
2
15
1
16
RES
RA1
8
9
10
A2
C3
A3
J1-8
C4
A4
J1-10
C5
A5
C6
A6
J2/6A
C7
A7
J2/7A
11
12
J1-12
13
14
J1-14
15
16
J1-16
17
18
J1-18
19
20
21
22
23
24
J1-24
25
26
J1-26
27
28
J1-28
29
30
J1-30
31
32
J1-32
J2/6C
J2/7C
J2/8C
J1-22
33
34
J1-34
35
36
F-GND
J1-21
J2/13C
FISCH-A2
FISCH-B2
FISCH-B3
FISCH-A3
38
J2/18C
40
J2/19C
J1-40
J1-22
J1-24
J1-25
SICHER
J2/24C
J2/25C
J1-26
J2/26C
GND
J1-27
J2/27C
IC17
J1-28
J1-29
J1-30
J1-31
FISCH-B1
FUSS-B2
Vcc
+5V
SICHER
J1-33
J1-34
J1-35
J1-40
2k2
PIC-CLK
PIC-RTCC
RES
J2/28C
17 RA0
18 RA1
RB0
6
FISCH-A1
J2/29C
RB1
7
FISCH-B3
J2/30C
1
RA2
RB2
8
FISCH-B2
+24V J2/31C
2
RA3
RB3
9
FISCH-A2
R2
J1-32
RB4
10
FUSS-A1
15 OSC2
16 OSC1
RB5
11
FUSS-B1
RB6
12
FUSS-A2
3
RTCC
RB7
13
FISCH-A3
4
MCLR
2
3
4
5
6
A10 7
A8 9
8
A9
10
A7
A6
11
12
A5
A4
13
14
A3
A2
15
16
A1
17
A11 19
A13 21
18
20
RD
A12
22
A14
A15 23
D4 25
24
26
D3
D5
27
28
D6
D2
29
30
D7
D0
31
32
D1
33
34
CS11
35
36
IORQ
37
38
39
40
CS10
C2
Vcc
+5V
MC-FREI
7
J1/33
7
39
J1-19
RA2
8*2k2
J1/29
6
68nF
J1/21
J1/25
5
2k2
A1
C8
A8
C9
A9
RES
ABUS
GND
A0
J2/8A
J2/9A
C10
A10
C11
A11
C12
A12
C13
A13
FUSS-A1
C14
A14
FUSS-B1
C15
A15
FUSS-A2
C16
A16
DBUS
FUSS-B2
C17
A17
C18
A18
C19
A19
C20
A20
C21
A21
C22
A22
C23
A23
J2/23A
C24
A24
J2/24A
C25
A25
J2/25A
C26
A26
J2/26A
C27
A27
J2/27A
C28
A28
J2/28A
C29
A29
J2/29A
C30
A30
C31
A31
C32
A32
FISCH-A1
FISCH-B1
J3
1
J2
C1
Vcc
+5V
J2/20C
9
C12
8
4
37
RA3
8*2k2
J1/19
3
Vcc
+5V
INT
MREQ
CS9
M1_PIO
WR
GND
ABUS
SIO-CLK
DBUS
GND
+5V
Vcc
GND
2k2
R22
J1/10
R25
2
1
Vcc
+5V
J1
R26
J1-9
J1/9
J2/30A
RES
PIC16C54
5
B
Datum
Name
Gezeich. 29.07.92 M.Fritz
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
Gepr ft
LP un.: 40128-026
LP bs.: 30128-052
Nr.
nderung
Datum
Name
Blatt 3 von 3
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
Gert/UNIT
ICC
Benennung/Title
CPU
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
30128-052
ICC 200, 300, 350
J1-8
2k2
R23
CPU PCB
30128-052
180 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
R24
J1/8
ICC 200, 300, 350
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
CPU PCB (bare)
40128-026
5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
181 / 266
D7
GND
2
GND
GND
3
BC557
T2
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
R OSC C
GND
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
Nr.
$plname
$rpname
5
L3
GND
nderung
GND
GND
Datum
GND
EN_5V
GND
Name
+
Gepr ft
ec130r50
GND
GND
0.7
GND
13-09-95Datum
A
Gezeich. 20-07-94
LP un.:
40121-060
LP bs.: 30128-410
Kleinsp.Netzteil
Blatt
30128-410
1 von 2
1.0
GND
M.Fritz
Name
40121-060
20-07-94
J.Beller
$plname
2
GND
GND
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
I
D6
GND
R19
U_NEG
-15V
79xx
O
GND
Benennung/Title
GND
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
$plname
$plname
2k2
220R
rot
$plname
1N4148
$plname
2n2
MUR120
$plname
20
R50
1uF
C67
GND
LED1
$plname
GND
C62
Vdd
+15V
GND
+
1
GND
$plname
GND
100nF
R23
+
+
rot
$plname
LED6
+
3k3
$plname
R15
100uF
ec130r50
100uF
C31
ec130r50
100uF
C30
ec130r50
1uF
C29
c100
C28
$plname
18k
R22
$plname
L1B
ec130r50
C63
GND
4k7
L1A
220uF
C64
R20
$plname
2k2
FEEDB
+
$plname
rot
0.7
$plname
SOFT
470R
$plname
1nF
100uH
$plname
ec130r50
$plname
100R
$plname
LED2
100uF
+
$plname
$rpname
rot
GND
100uF
+
5
L1
LED3
ec130r50
100uF
C44
D1
SB340
C26
R13
2u2
$plname
+
OUT 2
+
GND
ec130r50
GND
100uF
C61
+
100uF
C45
ec130r50
GND
100uF
C60
GND
+
GND
ec50r25
15
ec130r50
GND
1uF
C46
12 13
C14
5
c100
$plname
GND
4k7
GND
1uF
C59
$plname
9k1
4
C43
$plname
L4962
c100
GND
4k7
$plname
4k3
R49
$plname
5k6
14
8
$plname
200uH
$plname
R48
+
1000uF
OSC
1k
R31
2n2
R17
$plname
C12
rot
$plname
LED4
C17
ec380_17
INP
$plname
8
$plname
GND
R30
5
1
UE1
30121-037
2
2
11
C42
$plname
100nF
7
4k7
U_NEG
$plname
1nF
$rpname
R18
20
R44
100nF
$plname
470R
GND
C58
C57
D2
1
3
U_IN
R38
OUT
1nF
9
470R
BOOTS
FEEDB
$plname
GND
$plname
L4972
SB340
C41
R29
$plname
11
10
GND
$plname
GND
SB340
C56
R14
$plname
2n2
9
$plname
D3
GND
$plname
1
17
18
R OSC C
2n2
FCOMP
18
RESOUT
C55
17
C40
OUT
36k
$plname
GND
22nF
$plname
36k
7
16
BOOTS
FEEDB
$plname
GND
$plname
3
GND
7
16
22nF
$plname
15
L4972
22k
R36
C54
SOFT
VREF RD
22k
R28
$plname
C39
6
FCOMP
330pF
R35
PFAIL
15
GND
6
IC6
INP SYNCIN
VSTART
10
C38
$plname
5
2
RESOUT
$plname
C53
8
5
4
330pF
R27
+
13
GND
2u2
14
GND
ec50r25
11
GND
2
13
2u2
ec50r25
C34
+
R25
$plname
30k
IC1
INP SYNCIN
VSTART
+
C49
GND
+
+
ec50r25
2u2
SOFT
VREF RD
ec50r25
+
2u2
ec50r25
C35
PFAIL
2u2
1
ec50r25
GND
2u2
R42
GND
$plname
+
8
100R
ec50r25
2u2
C37
4
C52
+
$plname
10k
C36
14
C50
ec50r25
2u2
$plname
30k
GND
5V6
$plname
+
C32
ec380_17
1000uF
R26
GND
10
8
0.7
+24V
EN_5V
GND
U_IN
$plname
D5
IC10
to220l
-15V
Vee
0.7
G
3
GND
U_IN
Vcc
+5V
$plname
GND
MP4
Gert/UNIT
ICC
Kleinsp.-Netzteil
R12
$plname
22nF
$plname
15k
C13
ICC 200, 300, 350
5
GND
10k
C51
R33
GND
$plname
+
C47
ec380_17
11
Low Voltage Supply
30128-410
1000uF
R34
182 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
IC3
F.COMP
IC4
MP1
1
1
R5
10k
13
IC5
MP2
6
R6
2
5
200k 100k
3
1
4
4
5
Vdd
+15V
R7
IC2
10k
4066
3
J3
1
5
2
2
+
1uF
R37
2k2
C9
3
8
6n8
10nF
C6
C5
10nF
TDA7052
C10
NE555
GND
1
+
GND
5
3
GND
6
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
IC7
MP3
4
R3
RES
DCH
THD OUT 3
TRG
CV
7
10k
TP4
6
R8
2
5
100k
200k
9
IC8
1
8
A2
10k
4066
GND
6
RESET
CS-TON
9
TON1
TON2
TON-CPU
TON3
10k
TON3
ALARM
TIMEROFF
RESERVE
2
TIMEROFF
4
5
RESERVE
6
7
11
10
13
12
CS-TON
14
15
RESET
1D
A7
A9
TON2
ALARM
3
A6
A8
TON1
R24
R
C1
A5
Vdd
+15V
Vcc
+5V
GND
A3
A4
+24V
Vee
-15V
IC9
1
J1
A1
R9
10nF
C8
C7
10nF
C1
68nF
GND
n.best
GND
1
NE555
GND
4
Vdd
+15V
C16
TP3
2
5k1
10k
IC8
1
J2
1
+
RES
DCH
THD OUT 3
TRG
CV
7
3
C11
R2
n.best
BS170
T1
68nF
R39
4
1
2
1
R16
GND
100k
GND
12
10nF
C4
C3
10nF
NE555
3u3
4066
R10
5k1
n.best
5
200k 100k
IC8
1
R11
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
2
2
51k
TP1
R4
10
TP2
11
10k
6
1
IC8
RES
DCH
THD OUT 3
TRG
CV
7
4066
4
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
TON-CPU
40174
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
RN1
TON3
ALARM
TIMEROFF
RESERVE
A24
A25
A26
+24V
8
1
A27
7
6
5
4
8*10k
R21
TON2
A23
Vdd
+15V
9
GND
n.best
TON1
3
C2
CS-TON
2
68nF
RESET
A28
A29
MUR120
D4
Vdd
+15V
A
Datum
Gepr ft
68nF
68nF
C66
C18
68nF
C65
Gezeich. 20-07-94
Name
M.Fritz
20-07-94 J.Beller
LP un.: 40121-060
LP bs.: 30128-410
GND
Nr.
nderung
Datum
Name
Blatt 2 von 2
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
A30
A31
U_IN
A32
Gert/UNIT
ICC
Benennung/Title
Kleinsp.Netzteil
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
30128-410
ICC 200, 300, 350
Vdd
+15V
R1
Low Voltage Supply
30128-410
5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
183 / 266
ICC 200, 300, 350
Low Voltage Supply (unbestückt)
40121-060
182 / 264
5
SCHALTBILDER
-
GND
IC9
LM319
GND
12
2
GND
+
1
GND
GND
100pF
8k2
C28
10R
R88
3
D12
R53
D11
1N4148
4
9
Q
G
10
Q
11
OSC OUT
13
3
C20
68nF
10
13
15
14
GND
1
IC11
RCX
&
12
GND
CX
GND
11
33pF
12
GND IC13
3
4030
20k
C21
8
=1
2
TP13
6
1
1k
AST
AST
-TRIG
+TRIG
RTRIG
MR
RX
R65
R58
560R
R51
7k5
1k
R52
4
5
R67
IC18
5
EA
R
CX
9
RX/ CX
4528
43k
Vdd
+15V
IC12
C15
Vdd
+15V
Vdd
+15V
100pF
NT_EIN
U_INP
+15V
MP1
6
IA0
IA1
IA2
3
IA3
4047
14
2
IC13
4
10
&
11
9
2
10
IB0
IB1
12
IB2
13
IB3
R
CX
AN
Vdd
+15V
15
IC17
&
4
1
Vdd
+15V
&
12
6
3
+15V
Vdd
11
GND
33pF
GND
RX/ CX
Vdd
+15V
5
R77
2
Vdd
+15V
10
13
R
CX
7
15
2
RX/ CX
14
R
CX
4k7
Vdd
+15V
RX/ CX
Vdd
+15V
+
11
+
IC4
LM319
+
-
6
6 C11
68nF
Vee
-15V
GND
GND
68nF
GND
11
9
68nF
Vee
-15V
GND
100pF
TP14
C29
RX/ CX
15
4528
14
R
CX
9
RX/ CX
4528
220pF
GND
Datum
Gezeich. 15.02.94
7
GND
Name
28-11-94
Gepr ft
Fritz
Hagg
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
Gert/UNIT
ICC
Benennung/Title
+
8
GND
7
5k
1N4148
R73
1k
D17
100R
R76
1k
C19
GND
2
C
IC14
LM319
6 C17
GND
GND
1
-
-
68nF
Vee
-15V
Vdd
+15V
10
HF_EIN
+
IC14
LM319
C8
3V6
R71
Vdd
+15V
C18
GND
GND
1
10k
68nF
11
IC9
LM319
Vdd
+15V
GND
C 3584 C37,C38=330pF
10k
GND
C9
R74
68nF
Vdd
+15V
R75
C12
3V6
D13
R72
33k
D14
GND
T4
BS170
2
10
13
R
CX
R80
GND
MP2
6
3
12
+
&
12
1k
4
IC16
11
3
-
IC14
LM319
3
U_PRIM
GND
&
4
100pF
R70
1N4148
GND
1N4148
D15
GND
D16
GND
68nF
IC16
5
5
GND
Vdd
+15V
C30
4k7
R48
560R
10k
C10
2n2
R50
820R
R61
8
Vdd
+15V
TP15
C22
IPB
4528
470R
9
7
GND
R78
IC4
LM319
1k
-
5k
10
R81
R54
R49
2k2
D10
1N4148
AUS
9
4528
Vdd
+15V
B
4013
GND
IC17
4528
GND
A
12
OB 9
4539
2n2
R68
7
EB
9k1
C16
180R
GND
4013
GND
33pF
6
3
1
R57
13
11
R86
4
+
GND
10k
S
C
D
R
1
5k6
C32
7
GND
8
R60
5
EIN_AUS
5k6
C31
IC9
LM319
9
S0
S1
8
S
C
D
R
5
-
R56
IC21
IC21
6
3
10
1k
OA 7
4
1k
R69
5
Vdd
+15V
Vdd
+15V
4k7
R59
Vdd
+15V
B 3371 R12=10R
30-1-96
Fritz
11-94
Fritz
Datum
Name
LP un.:
LP bs.:
40128-095
30128-357
GND
Nr.
nderung
Blatt
1 von
3
CONTROL-BOARD
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
30128-357
TSI
ICC 200, 300, 350
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
Control board
30128-357
5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
185 / 266
CS_DAC2
13
-
14
IC1
TL084
14
ANALOG_3
17
RESET
12 +
AD7224
3
1
Vcc
+5V
1nF
R84
33pF
TP16
R85
20k
1
GND
10k
GND
GND
10k
T5
BS170
=1
4030
3
5
GND
2
4
2
AD654
2k
C27
R38
3
D18
4030
DGND
9
R82
CT
-
1N4148
1k
C23
R79
U
F
4
T1
BC547
MP3
GND
IC12
Vdd
+15V
13
12
11
=1
TSI_STE
4030
1
R35
GND
GND
2k
10k
8
=1
5
12
GND
+
TP17
LDAC
WR
CS
RES
15
IC4
LM319
4
4k7
2n2
1
Fout
STE_EIN
R10
A
CT
IC12
6
2
D1
D7
TP7
5k
3k3
1N4148
R11
GND
16
2k
U_PHASE
5
R36
Vcc
+5V
GND
rot
GND
C7
4k7
6
RT
7
6
R43
7
D
R44
TP8
5k
10R
8
3
Vdd
+15V
4k7
9
U_FUNKE/2
Vin
3
10
R12
U_FUNKE
4
2
VOUT
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
R47
11
GND
IC15
+
1k
12
GND
FUNKE_AUS
13
18
C25
IC12 68nF
8
10k
D0-D7
GND
5
Vdd
+15V
1k
68nF
IC8
C24
C1
Vdd
+15V
R83
C26
MP5
GND
1nF
11
-
Vee
68nF
-15V
Vdd
+15V
STEUERBUS
4
GND
+
IC1
TL084
GND
IC10
GND
GND
D0-D7
14
R22
13
12
D6
5k
R7
GND
1
R21
9
DAC_A1
ANALOG_2
8
WR
7
CS
GND
GND
3u3
3
7
4
2n2
R62
13
4082
10
4528
11
12
4078
C1 1
IPB
A
IC10
C2 24
11
Vdd
+15V
C3 23
MAX516
5
4
&
12
GND
10
15
IC7
R
CX
9
9
10
11
14
RX/ CX
GND
+
15uF
5k
GND
C36
RESET
1
3 +
TP2
D9
-
IC2
LM324
4082
SICHER
5k1
1N4148
5
2
3k3
13
U_NETZT/2
U_INT_A
68k
U_INT
&
12
21 20
R25
GND
1
RX/ CX
4528
R26
&
5
2
13
CS_DAC1
IC7
2
R
CX
NT_EIN
GND
1
D
2k
330pF
10k
10
DAC_A0
IC1
TL084
GND
R1
TP1
5k6
2
5
9
C0 2
n.best
R3
U_NETZT
11
3 +
C38
TP4
3k3
1N4148
2k
IP_PAT
+
15
GND
Vcc
+5V
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
A0
A1
3
2n2
R24
16
2k
330pF
17
GND
R6
18
19
R66
GND
4
GND
IC6
ANALOG_1
5 +
10k
1
GND
4k7
C13
7
6
3
3k9
C14
IC1
TL084
GND
3
VCC
-
GND
&
4
2
ANA0
ANA1
ANA2
ANA3
5k
R5
C37
TP3
3k3
6
Vdd
+15V
REF
D5
R4
UP_HF
1N4148
2k
1k
C6
STEUERBUS
R23
Vcc
+5V
R55
5
Vdd
+15V
IC5
C
Datum
Gezeich. 15.02.94
Name
Fritz
GND
Gepr ft
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
C 3584 C37,C38=330pF
B 3371 R12=10R
Nr.
nderung
30-1-96
Fritz
11-94
Fritz
Datum
Name
LP un.:
LP bs.:
Blatt
28-11-94
Hagg
40128-095
30128-357
2 von
3
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
Gert/UNIT
ICC
Benennung/Title
CONTROL-BOARD
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
30128-357
EIN_AUS
ICC 200, 300, 350
C3
68nF
Control board
30128-357
186 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Vdd
+15V
MP6
R
C1
9
Vdd
+15V
U_FUNKE/2
C5
R28
STEUERBUS
U_INT_A
GND
468nF
+
6k8
IC2
LM324
6
-
R8
UP_HF_A
5k
7
MUX_A0
11
10
MUX_A1
D4
13
12
MUX_A2
D5
14
15
MUX_A3
11
180nF
3
2
23
D1
4
22
GND
5k
21
20
19
GND
18
R13
17
U_SYM
16
1D
5
MUX_A2
D2
6
7
13
MUX_A3
D3
11
10
D4
13
12
D5
14
15
BER_2
FUNKE_AUS
9
-
IC1
TL084
8
1k
B4
A5
Vee
-15V
B5
Vdd
+15V
A6
B6
A7
B7
Vcc
+5V
A8
B8
A13
B13
ANALOG_4
D4
A14
B14
D5
A15
B15
D6
A16
B16
D7
A17
B17
SICHER
A18
B18
NT_EIN
A19
B19
HF_EIN
A20
B20
STE_EIN
A21
B21
A22
B22
TSI
A23
B23
A
A24
B24
B
A25
B25
AN
A26
B26
AUS
A27
B27
U_INP
A28
B28
U_INT
A29
B29
U_NETZT
A30
B30
U_FUNKE
A31
B31
U_SYM
A32
B32
U_NESSY
8V2
D4
RES_ANA1
3
n.best
2
UP_HF_A
T2
BC547
3
TP11
R63
Vdd
+15V
GND
+24V
2
BER_2
T3
BC338
R41
1
10k
R39
10k
3k3
R45
D2
100R
R46
1N4148
D3
68R
1N4148
U_NETZT
RN2
RESET
R42
CS_DAC1
CS_DAC2
2k
R40
R19
2k
R16
500R
TP12
500R
RES_ANA2
GND
CS_DFF1
GND
3k3
R20
U_PHASE
CS_DFF2
NT_EIN
R32
HF_EIN
GND
R29
SICHER
2k
R31
-
4k7
IC2
LM324
12k
-
IC2
LM324
10 +
2
3
RN1
D0
2
D1
3
D2
4
6
D3
5
7
D4
6
D5
7
D6
8
D7
9
Vdd
+15V
4
5
1
8
9
8x10k
10k
13
9
TEMP
1
5k
R2
UP_HF
10k
GND
Vdd
+15V
1
8x10k
STE_EIN
14
R87
12 +
8
C
Vee
-15V
GND
Datum
Gezeich. 15.02.94
Gepr ft
4k7
R89
ANALOG_3
D3
IP_PAT_A
10k
10k
R30
ANALOG_2
B12
TSI_STE
5k1
R14
TP10
GND
GND
B11
A12
IP_PAT
R15
GND
A11
D2
I_HFL
RES_ANA1
TEMP
ANALOG_1
D1
U_PRIM
R64
Vcc
+5V
B10
CS_DFF2
Vdd
+15V
Vdd
+15V
A10
CS_DFF1
GND
+24V
B9
A9
CS_DAC2
BER_1
Vee
-15V
D0
CS_DAC1
R18
3k3
B3
A4
RES_ANA2
I_HFL
3k3
B2
A3
RESET
GND
3k3
A2
ANALOG_4
10 +
GND
B1
40174
MP4
2k
A1
BER_1
R33
R37
C34
GND
GND
2
14
1
C33
0.6
+24V
MUX_A1
15
3u3
+
0.8
R
C1
9
3
Vcc
+5V
Z
1
CS_DFF2
D0
R34
4
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
Y9
Y10
Y11
Y12
Y13
Y14
Y15
0.6
3u3
+
J1
2k
5k
5
C35
TP6
6
D3
MUX_A0
D8
IP_PAT_A
TP9
10
1N4148
7
6
3k3
A0
A1
A2
A3
INH
C2
8
GND
R9
100R
D2
RESET
GND
GND
9
U_NESSY
DAC_A1
40174
STEUERBUS
GND
GND
DAC_A0
5
1D
IC20
Vee
68nF
-15V
1nF
R27
750R
4067
R17
2
4
11C4
IC3
3k3
3
D1
-
7
5 +
3k3
D0
STEUERBUS
IC2
LM324
TP5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
Vdd
+15V
STEUERBUS
U_NETZT/2
C 3584 C37,C38=330pF
B 3371 R12=10R
Nr.
nderung
30-1-96
Fritz
11-94
Fritz
Datum
Name
28-11-94
Name
Fritz
Hagg
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
Gert/UNIT
ICC
Benennung/Title
40128-095
LP bs.: 30128-357
CONTROL-BOARD
Blatt 3 von
30128-357
LP un.:
3
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
ICC 200, 300, 350
1
RESET
CS_DFF1
Control board
30128-357
5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
187 / 266
ICC 200, 300, 350
Control board (bare)
40128-095
188 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
C6
12
&
3
9
10
1
T3
VN10KM
2
D8
T1
3
A10
R3
GND
150R
15
1
2
GND
A14
A16
IC2
A17
7
2
30128-539
6
1
J2
1
9
&
10
5
4
1
T7
VN10KM
2
3
4081
A23
4049
IC2
4011
A24
A25
3
A27
T8
VN10KM
2
2
1
A26
C3
8
C1
3
+
&
3u3
1
A22
C8
IC1
2
A21
MP1
3
A20
4049
IC2
1
IC4
1uF
A19
GND
GND
J3
GND
1
4049
2
A28
2
1
1
5
4
1
T10
VN10KM
2
D7
T2
6
GND
GND
R6
IC3
9
IRFP460
1N5346
2
30128-539
10
1
1
MUR120
1
3
4049
150R
1
MUR120
D5
D6
UE2
R4
2
3
7
T9
VN10KM
150R
4049
IC3
D4
11
4011
R1
&
3
13
MP2
22nF
12
2k2
C4
4049
IC3
IC1
1
A32
MUR860
3
A31
D2
Vdd
+15V
IC3
A30
MUR860
A29
C11
R7
2
BC557
1N4148
T11
D12
R8
3
GND
B
4081
GND
GND
+
C10
&
R9
13
4081
Name
GND
Nr.
nderung
Datum
Name
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
Gert/UNIT
ICC
Benennung/Title
40128-127
30128-528
QC Power Stage
LP bs.:
Blatt
1 von 1
30128-528
LP un.:
1uF
100k
11
1k
10
Datum
Gezeich. 11-12-95 M. Hagg
GND
Gepr ft
12
&
GND
IC4
8
GND
GND
Vdd
+15V
1
11V
IC4
T5
VN10KM
2
15
1
4049
100k
D11
T6
VN10KM
2
4049
IC3
14
1
RN1
GND
12
1
+
11
5
7
4
4011
Vdd
+15V
8*10k
3
2
4
8
6
9
&
3
5
3u3
6
C9
4
3
&
4081
68nF
6
4049
IC3
IC1
1
IC4
5
9
1uF
1
A18
IRFP460
1N5346
3
4049
A15
MUR120
R2
1
MUR120
D10
D9
UE1
R5
14
A13
2
3
A12
T4
VN10KM
150R
4049
IC2
4011
A11
C2
1
D3
2
A9
22nF
4049
IC2
IC1
A8
1
A7
u68
1
MUR860
11
D1
Vdd
+15V
A6
MUR860
Vdd
+15V
IC2
2k2
C5
3u3
GND
GND
1
A5
C12
A4
68nF
C7
GND
A3
+
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
A2
68nF
A1
+15V
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
ICC 200, 300, 350
+15V
J1
QC Power Stage
30128-528
5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
189 / 266
ICC 200, 300, 350
QC Power Stage (bare)
40128-127
190 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
MP4
REL1
7
$rpname
D3
$plname
C1
L1
UE1
U-HF-AE
2
c225_11
C2
c100
c225_11
10nF
C7
c380
150pF
2
U-HF-NE
J2
T2_TSI
IRFP450
R19
J14
5
Vdd
+15V
$plname
$rpname
1
4
IC1
7667
m3schraub
$plname
3R3
$plname
R7
$plname
470k
BA159
$plname
D2
R12
r150
R9
$plname
$plname
IRFP450
7
$rpname
10k
1.0
IC1
7667
$plname
GND
T2
$plname
R1
3R3
C12
c100
150pF
Vdd
+15V
330R
R11
$plname
T1
2
2k
r150
1k
r150
1k
R15
R13
r150
3
1
GND-STE
$plname
J1
4
30128-044
0R47
UE3
30121-073
5
MP3
$plname
GND
2
2
c225_6
1n5
158uH
r200
d50b10skk
MUR860
1
68nF
C5
+
C6
R5
1
10uF
ec130r
47k
QKE2
$plname
D4
$plname
$rpname
0.47uF
C14
10uF
ec130r
+
$plname
47k
+
C4
C10
GND
+
$plname
c430
9n5
GND
J4
22uF
R4
12
22uF
R6
$plname
52uH
1
C11
4
ec150r
2
3
ec150r
C17
L2
$plname
$plname
MUR860
REL1
10
1k
R14
C28
22nF
c150
68nF
$plname
C9
200k
$plname
BUZ74
R16
$plname
GND
1k
GND
51k
GND
GND
A7
$plname
GND
R3
GND
1uF
C18
$plname
A6
1nF
R8
10k
Vdd
+15V
A5
C13
$plname
+
C16
A4
R10
u68
GND
c150
A3
$plname
$plname
A2
C8
A1
3u3
+
T3
$plname
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
QKE1
$plname
d50b10skk
9
1
A8
A9
GND
A10
A16
TSI
U-PRIM
NTE
U-NETZT
$rpname
1N4148
A15
$plname
REL1
A14
D5
A13
$plname
A12
U-INT
U-INP
A11
TEMP
A17
A18
NTE
Vdd
+15V
A19
Vdd
+15V
A20
A21
30k
TEMP
A22
A23
R2
MP2
NTC1
2.0
J3
1206
$plname
0.8
1
U-NT-STE
10k
C3
2
MP1
TSI
3
4
A24
A27
U-INP
A28
U-INT
A29
U-NETZT
3u3
A26
68nF
D1
+
U-PRIM
$plname
C15
$plname
A25
5
GND-STE
$plname
$plname
9V1
GND
GND
A30
A31
A32
D
19-11-97
Datum
Name
Gezeich. 31-05-95 M.Fritz
Gepr ft
D 3696 s.Anderungsmitt.
22-1-96
C 3570 s.Anderungsmitt.
17-7-95
Fritz
Datum
Name
Nr.
2
IC2
7667
7
$plname
191 / 266
$rpname
R17
TSI
4
$plname
$wert
R18
IC2
7667
5
T2_TSI
$plname
$plname
$rpname
$wert
nderung
Fritz
LP un.:
LP bs.:
Blatt
40128-117
31-05-95 M. Hagg
40128-117
30128-478
1 von 1
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
Gert/UNIT
ICC
Benennung/Title
Power-Module
Power-Module
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
30128-478
ICC 200, 300, 350
U-NT-STE
UE2
3
Power Module
30128-478
Power Module (UL)
30128-492
5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
ICC 200, 300, 350
Power Module (bare)
Power Module UL (bare)
40128-117
192 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
MP1
GND
4
6
13
12
REL3
F-ST
UE1
1
1
2
J3
3
4020
REL19
A5
2
D1
3
D2
4
A10
D0
D3
5
A11
D1
D4
6
A12
D2
D5
7
A13
D3
D6
8
A14
D4
D7
9
A15
D5
A16
D6
A17
D7
RESET
CS5
BUS
F-ST
A23
A24
A25
A26
9
CS5
A21
A22
1
RESET
D0
3
7
1N4148
IC4
7667
+24V
5
3
GND
REL2
4
5
3
14
D2
14
15
4
ULN2004A 13
D3
13
12
1
16
D4
11
10
2
15
D5
6
7
5
12
6
11
40174
11N80
10R
Vdd
+15V
IC7
2
R3
AUS
2
TSI-STE
J7
T1
1
4
REL1
D1
A27
IC4
7667
SG
R
C1
J6
1
2
1D
REL1
D4
C5
CS3
A20
GND
J14
REL1
IC6
A19
J5
1
Vdd
+15V
8x10k
A18
REL2
1nF
1
GND
1
4k7
REL2
7
GND
REL3
GND
3u3
GND
BUS
C2
+
68nF
C6
RN2
D0
68nF
C10
BUS
A9
2
2
J2
A8
1
3
1
A6
A7
1
R1
4k7
R2
J4
L1
Vdd
+15V
C1
1nF
6n8
+24V
AE
3
2
REL19
15
A3
A4
REL3
14
MUR860
GND
A2
R
5
C3
11
AUS
7
150pF
D1
J1
A1
9
Q1
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
Q9
Q10
Q11
Q12
Q13
Q14
C4
CLK
u33
10
SG
TSI-STE
C9
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
IC1
GND
10
A28
REL19
A29
8
A30
A31
A32
9
RN1
CS3
CS5
RESET
2
GND
4
3
Vdd
+15V
5
1
6
7
8
9
B
8x4k7
GND
Name
Gepr ft
0.6
+15V
Vdd
0.8
Datum
Gezeich. 15-03-96 M.Fritz
B
R1,R2 neu hinzu
Nr.
nderung
12-8-96
Fritz
Datum
Name
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
Gert/UNIT
ICC
Benennung/Title
LP un.:
40128-129
LP bs.: 30128-555
ST-Power-Stage
Blatt 1 von 1
30128-555
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
NE
ICC 200, 300, 350
MP3
ST Power Stage
30128-555
5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
193 / 266
ICC 200, 300, 350
ST Power Stage (bare)
40128-129
194 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
7k5
1N4148
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
Vdd
+15V
C28
GND
GND
1N4148
3 +
-
IC8
TL084
1k
5
4
GND
-
R48
C29
GND
Vee
-15V
GND
14
12 +
IP_PAT
R50
R61
GND
D27
6
OFF
TZ
1nF
D32
D31
1N4148
C27
220pF
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
GND
13
8
IC7
AD844
2k
10k
GND
GND
3 +
68nF
TL084
IC8
IP_PAT_A
1
-
REL2
5
2
TEILER
R62
Vdd
+15V
REL2
REL3
REL1
REL3
REL1
7k5
MONO
AE
J5
J3
NE_NESSY
BIPOLAR
NE
AE
1
-+
R49
2
4k7
7
R47
1M
C30
R21
68nF
GND
R63
750R
6k8
R52
D10
NE
7k5
IC8
TL084
GND
7
5 +
J1
AE
TL084
IC9
GND
1N4148 1N4148
68nF
GND
GND
6k8
U_PHASE
1
-
GND
GND
R65
GND
4k7
4k7
u22
R40
C13
R55
GND
68nF
GND
4
+
IC3
LM319
6
750R
Vdd
+15V
C32
11
+
MP1
R39
2
1k3
GND
Vdd
+15V
C11
FROM GENERATOR
8
3 +
D21
+
10R
R13
D18
D19
1N4148
GND
GND
10 +
TL084
IC8
10k
R14
R15
R16
2k
GND
R64
10k
GND
68nF
GND
D20
8
GND
UP_HF
R51
IC8
TL084
B
-
11 C31
C12
68nF
Vee
-15V
GND
68nF
Vee
-15V
Datum
Fritz
12.08.96
Fritz
Gepr ft
GND
Name
Gezeich. 12.08.96
40128-130
bs.: 30128-561
LP un.:
B 4343 C39 neu hinzu
Nr.
nderung
12-1-98
Fritz
Datum
Name
LP
Blatt
1 von
3
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
4k7
1nF
R53
R25
D22
2k
C15
1M
C33
1k
GND
Vee
-15V
7
1
2
3
1N4148
-
IC3
LM319
10k
100:8
J2
GND
-
R54
9
-
9
1
GND
D23
6
5
4
10
2k
2
R22
2
GND
OFF
TZ
Vdd
+15V
UE2
1
3
GND
6
8
R37
150pF
NE
1
3 +
-
Vee
-15V
7k5
C1
15V
GND
D29
GND
2k
D28
GND
R38
R67
1
R17
68nF
-+
IC4
AD844
T3
BS170
2
3
Vee
-15V
GND
1N4148
GND
GND
+
470R
R24
GND
D17
R74
D16
GND
4
C14
7
2
12
10k
GND
IC3
LM319
3M3
UE1
1N4148
1k
2
R11
1
1k
R12
18k
Vdd
+15V
3
-
J10
1N4148
5
D33
R23
R20
1:50
J8
AE
560R
J7
J9
1N4148
Gert/UNIT
ICC
Benennung/Title
SENSO-BOARD
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
30128-561
UP_HF_A
ICC 200, 300, 350
R36
D26
Senso-board
30128-561
5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
195 / 266
-
I+9
IC9
TL084
750k
4
150k
10nF
R8
C5
750k
6
8
12
9
IMAS
NE
2
1nF
R3
1k
C8
IMAS
1
3
AST
AST
-TRIG
+TRIG
RTRIG
MR
RX
1
G
Q
10
Q
11
13
2
8:8:8
GND
0R
GND
GND
GND
T2
VN10KM
2
OSC OUT
1N4148
3
R58
T1
VN10KM
R33
5
U_FUNKE
4k7
15V
D2
R5
2
IC1
I+9
D1
15V
R4
1
14
3 +
7
22k
R7
10k
C22
R6
10k
C4
R2
750k
AE
R32
5 +
1
1
220pF
R1
750k
IC2
TL082
D15
10nF
-
UE5
3
Vdd
+15V
CX
4
+
3
IC9
TL084
RCX
-
4047
I+9
IMAS
8
+
IMAS
Vee
-15V
6
-
IC2
TL082
IC2
TL082
7
5 +
I-9
IMAS
4
Vdd
+15V
11
7
Vdd
+15V
R9
D4
10nF
1N4148
1N4148
UE6
9V1
+
1uF
D5
D3
C6
+
C23
R34
1k
2n2
12:16
+
IMAS
GND
GND
GND
GND
18pF
18pF
R35
56R
+
C25
1uF
3V
D25
1
C10
T6
BC547
C9
2
3u3
C26
3
2
C7
9V1
I-9
D6
1
1uF
C24
I+9
10R
GND
5
B
Datum
Name
Gezeich. 12.08.96
Fritz
12.08.96
Fritz
Gepr ft
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
Nr.
nderung
12-1-98
Fritz
Datum
Name
Gert/UNIT
ICC
Benennung/Title
40128-130
LP bs.: 30128-561
SENSO-BOARD
Blatt 2 von
30128-561
LP un.:
B 4343 C39 neu hinzu
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
3
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
ICC 200, 300, 350
6
2
Senso-board
30128-561
196 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
R10
1k
GND
C35
R56
+
3u3
3k
R57
C57
GND
GND
Vee
-15V
3k
1uF
R26
1k
+
C36
R27
100R
L2
2:2:15
GND
U_SYM
8
9
10k
9:7
C38
3
100uH
R73
2
TL084
IC9
1N4148
68nF
10k
1
10k
C2
u1
R72
L1
2
3m3
1
C3
UE3
u1
R71
UE4
2n2
GND
J6
GND
R28
A1
Vdd
+15V
GND
1N4148
TL084
IC9
30k
U_NESSY
14
GND
A7
A8
A9
-
R66
13
GND
68nF
A6
Vcc
+5V
GND
4k7
C21
10k
Vee
-15V
GND
12 +
1k
Vdd
+15V
D30
6
5
4
R43
R41
4k7
GND
R60
C34
3 +
-
8
A4
A5
Vee
-15V
68nF
R59
12k
R42
GND
IC5 B/C1 C2
LM318 B/C3
1nF
C17
1nF
C19
2k4
C16
220pF
R18
R19
A3
+24V
GND
1
-+
A2
GND
C18
7 68nF
2
2k4
150R
C39
2k4
10nF
R29
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
10 +
D9
C20
+
Vdd
+15V
NE
3
3u3
2
GND
D0
A10
D1
A11
D2
A12
D3
A13
D4
A14
D5
A15
D6
A16
D7
A17
STEUERBUS
A18
A19
A20
A21
U_FUNKE
Vdd
+15V
8x10k
T7
BS170
T8
BS170
2
1
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
1
A32
2
TEILER
4
5
OSZI_DIS
6
7
11
10
13
12
1D
14
OSZI_DIS
3
2
10k
R69
15
2
T11
BC547
3
2
T9
BC547
T10
BC547
1
1
1
GND
GND
GND
10k
R68
1k
R45
R46
10k
GND
3
R70
40174
GND
REL1
3
REL3
D7
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
Vee
-15V
3
D0
REL2
D14
Vee
-15V
A30
A31
R
C1
1N4148
9
8
7
6
5
4
D2
4
9
STEUERBUS
3
2
D0
5 6
A29
IC10
1
GND
-
A28
+24V
D13
Vee
-15V
D24
1N4148
3
B B/S
2
2
+
1
2
3
LM311
D1
10k
BC557
T5
RN1
-
A27
IP_PAT
3
1
A26
IP_PAT_A
1N4148
R44
Vdd
+15V
1N4148
IC6
7
A25
UP_HF
1
R30
1
8
+
UP_HF_A
5k6
Vdd
+15V
5k6
R31
T4
BC547
+
A24
U_PHASE
2
C37
A23
U_NESSY
3
3u3
A22
U_SYM
Vdd
+15V
GND
10k
B
Datum
Name
Gezeich. 12.08.96
Fritz
12.08.96
Fritz
Gepr ft
Nr.
nderung
12-1-98
Fritz
Datum
Name
Gert/UNIT
ICC
Benennung/Title
40128-130
LP bs.: 30128-561
SENSO-BOARD
Blatt 3 von
30128-561
LP un.:
B 4343 C39 neu hinzu
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
3
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
ICC 200, 300, 350
J4
1
NE_NESSY
Senso-board
30128-561
5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
197 / 266
ICC 200, 300, 350
Senso-board (bare)
40128-130
198 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
J5
J4
Mainboard
2
Power-Module
1
J6
J3
J2
1
2
QK-Endstufe
J1
1
2
A
Datum
Name
Gezeich. 17-05-95 M.Fritz
Gepr ft
17-05-95 M.Hagg
LP un.: 40128-118
LP bs.: 30128-479
Nr.
nderung
Datum
Name
Blatt 1 von 1
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
Gert/UNIT
ICC
Benennung/Title
Upper Wiring Module
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
30128-479
ICC 200, 300, 350
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
Upper Wiring Module
30128-479
5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
199 / 266
ICC 200, 300, 350
Upper Wiring Module (bare)
40128-118
200 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
PCBs
only for ICC 200
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Kleinspannung+Ton
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
J1
Vcc
+5V
Control-Board
J2
QK-Endstufe
Leistungsteil
J4
J3
J5
J6
A1
C1
A1
A1
B1
A1
A1
A2
C2
A2
A2
B2
A2
A2
A3
C3
A3
A3
B3
A3
A3
A4
C4
A4
A4
B4
A4
A4
A5
C5
A5
A5
B5
A6
C6
A6
B6
A7
C7
A7
B7
GND
GND
ST-Endstufe
GND
A1
A2
GND
GND
GND
A3
GND
ANALOG-1
ANALOG-2
ANALOG-3
ANALOG-4
A6
CS
A8
A7
A10
+24V
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
Vee
Vdd
+15V -15V
Vcc
+5V
Vcc
+5V
A8
C8
SET
A9
+24V
C9
A9
C10
A10
EIN1
EIN2
EIN3
EIN4
EIN5
EIN6
EIN7
A11
C11
A11
A12
C12
A12
A13
C13
A14
C14
A15
C15
A16
C16
A17
C17
A18
C18
ESD6
A17
ESD7
A18
CS1
EIN17
C20
ESD3
ESD4
ESD5
EIN16
C19
ESD3
ESD4
A16
EIN15
A20
ESD1
ESD2
A15
EIN14
A19
ESD1
A14
EIN13
A19
RESET
EIN18
A20
EIN19
A21
A22
EIN8
EIN9
EIN10
EIN11
PSD7
PSD5
PSD3
PSD1
A23
C23
A24
C24
A25
C25
A23
A26
C26
A27
C27
A28
C28
A29
C29
A30
C30
A31
C31
EIN22
EIN23
PSD6
PSD4
A32
A15
A16
B16
A16
A17
B17
A18
B18
A19
B19
A20
B20
A21
ESD1
A12
ESD2
A13
A13
ESD3
ESD3
ESD3
A14
A14
ESD4
ESD4
A15
A15
ESD5
ESD5
A16
A16
ESD6
ESD7
ESD6
A17
A17
A17
ESD7
ESD7
A18
A18
A18
NTE
A19
A19
A20
A20
A21
A21
CS6
A19
RESET
REL-NT
A20
CS7
B21
A22
A21
TEMP
A22
A22
A22
B22
F-ST
TSI
A23
B23
A24
B24
A25
B25
B26
A27
B27
A28
B28
A29
B29
A30
B30
A31
B31
A24
A24
B
U-PRIM
AN
A26
A26
A26
AUS
A25
A25
A25
AN
A26
TSI
A
A24
B
A23
A23
A23
A
TSI-STE
AUS
A27
A27
A27
A28
A28
A29
A29
A30
A30
A30
A31
A31
A31
A32
A32
A32
U-INP
U-INP
U-INT
A28
U-INT
U-NETZT
A29
U-NETZT
U-FUNKE
U-SYM
A32
B32
U-NESSY
U-PHASE
RESET
ESD0
ESD1
TEMP
UP-HF-A
A32
C32
A14
B15
Vcc
+5V
STE-EIN
UP-HF
A31
PSD0
B14
A9
A11
ESD2
A13
B13
A15
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
A10
A12
HF-EIN
CS2
IP-PAT-A
A30
PSD2
ESD1
ESD2
A14
A7
A8
Vcc
+5V
A11
A12
A13
A6
ESD0
NT-EIN
IP-PAT
A29
B12
A9
A11
SICHER
RES-ANA1
A28
A12
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
A10
ESD0
+24V
A5
A8
Vcc
+5V
ESD6
ESD6
ESD7
RESET
RES-ANA2
A27
A9
A10
ESD5
ESD5
I-HFL
A26
B11
A7
A8
Vcc
+5V
B10
A11
A6
ESD4
TSI-STE
A25
EIN21
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
ANALOG-4
U-PRIM
A24
EIN20
A7
ANALOG-3
CS5
SICHER
A6
A4
+24V
A5
ANALOG-2
CS4
A22
C22
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
B8
B9
+24V
A5
ANALOG-1
CS3
A21
C21
A9
ESD0
ESD2
A13
EIN12
A8
A10
ESD0
+24V
24V-TR
24V-TR
I-HFL
GND
B
Datum
Name
Gezeich. 25-05-92 M.Fritz
Gepr ft
Nr.
8-93
MF
nderung
Datum
Name
Gert/UNIT
ICC 200
Benennung/Title
40128-025
LP bs.: 30128-033
Motherboard 200
Blatt
30128-033
LP un.:
RN18=2k2
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
1 von
5
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
ICC 200
CPU
Motherboard
30128-033
5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
203 / 266
Vcc
+5V
A7
Vdd
+15V
GND
9
8
7
6
5
4
8*10k
RN15
3
2
C4
68nF
C3
68nF
8*10k
1
Vdd
+15V
1
2
9
10
A6
GND
FING-B1
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
8
9
FING-A1
7
8
+24V
6
6
7
+24V
A5
5
5
4
4
A4
3
2
3
RELAIS
GND
Vdd
+15V
Vcc
+5V
RN8
J8
1
A3
A2
68nF
A1
C24
J7
Vcc
+5V
GND
RESET
A8
Vcc
+5V
GND
IC4
IC10
ESD6
A17
PSD0
ESD7
A18
CS8
PSD1
RESET
PSD2
A19
A20
PSD3
A21
U-FUNKE
A22
SET
U-SYM
A23
U-NESSY
Vcc
+5V
A24
U-PHASE
A25
UP-HF-A
R2
10k
A26
UP-HF
A27
16
14
8
4
13
7
5
12
6
6
11
5
7
10
ULN2004A
RESET
15
CS1
Ton J2
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
4
8
18
9
Vdd
+15V
17
GND
20
19
14
13
8*10k
10k
CS
ESD5
A16
3
16
15
9
ESD4
A15
2
10
8
A14
1
9
7
ESD3
11
1
0
1
2
3
1
C20
4
5
2
20D 0
6
3
0
7
G
21
15 8
22
3
9
10
23
EN
11
12
13
14
15
4514
R1
6
Vcc
+5V
5
ESD2
A13
4
DMUX
ESD1
A12
RN16
ESD0
A11
3
A10
2
A9
IC11
1
IP-PAT-A
16
ULN2004A
2
A28
CS7
15
CS8
IP-PAT
A29
3
14
A30
4
13
A31
5
12
A32
6
11
7
10
CS9
CS10
CS11
CS12
8
9
GND
ESD2
ESD3
ESD4
ESD5
ESD6
5
ESD7
RESET
CS11
CS12
RES-ANA1
RES-ANA2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
FING-A3
15
16
FING-B3
17
18
RES-B1
19
20
RES-B2
21
22
RES-B3
23
24
RES-B4
25
26
RES-B5
27
28
RES-B6
29
30
RES-F1
31
32
RES-F2
33
34
RES-F3
35
36
RES-F4
37
38
RES-F5
39
40
-15V
+24V Vee
Vdd
+15V
Vcc
+5V
CS13
2
3
4
5
6
7
CS14
8*10k
ESD1
GND
2
3
1
ESD0
+24V
J9
1
9
-15V
Vee
8
Vdd
+15V
RN9
GND
Vcc
+5V
Vcc
+5V
B
Datum
Name
Gezeich. 25-05-92 M.Fritz
Gepr ft
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
Nr.
8-93
MF
nderung
Datum
Name
LP
Blatt
Gert/UNIT
ICC 200
Benennung/Title
40128-025
bs.: 30128-033
LP un.:
RN18=2k2
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
2 von
5
Motherboard 200
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
30128-033
ICC 200
Mono-Output-Board
Motherboard
30128-033
204 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Senso-Board
+24V
REL1
RLV
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
REL1
D1
J11
1
1N4148
REL1
2
5
D2
R3
6
3k6
F1
~
R5
100R
T200mA
-
$wert
BR1
1
1
Leistungsteil
Vcc
+5V
+24V
0.5
0.5
22k
+
C6
J16
680uF
R6
~
J20
Vdd
+15V
Vee
-15V
+
BH37933
J15
u68
GND
1
Vcc
+5V
TR1
~
BR2
C10
68nF
Frontplatte
J10
3
24V-TR
+
B250C5000
24V
MASSE
1000uF
-
+
Prim.2
u022
u022
C33
C32
Sek.
1
C15
1
GND
2
~
1
J12
GND
0.5
1
Prim.1
J22 J18
C8
GND
68nF
C23
GND
68nF
C9
GND
Vdd
+15V
J19
Gehuse
68nF
J14
22k
C5
+
C7
680uF
R9
2
C22
3
68nF
C11
6
68nF
1
J13
1
GND
GND
GND
J21 J17
1
1
B
Datum
Name
Gezeich. 25-05-92 M.Fritz
Gepr ft
Nr.
8-93
MF
nderung
Datum
Name
LP bs.: 30128-033
Blatt
Gert/UNIT
ICC 200
Benennung/Title
LP un.: 40128-025
RN18=2k2
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
3 von
5
Motherboard 200
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
30128-033
ICC 200
Motherboard
30128-033
5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
205 / 266
1
8*10k
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
16
ULN2004A
ESD0
15
ESD1
3
14
4
13
5
12
6
11
7
10
ESD2
PSD2
ESD3
PSD3
ESD4
PSD4
ESD5
PSD5
ESD6
PSD6
ESD7
PSD7
D8
R10
9
GND
Vdd
+15V
1
9
3
4
5
6
2
1N4148
7
RESET
8
RN6
D3
8*10k
1
2k2
$wert
8
Vcc
+5V
Vdd
+15V
ext. Steuerbus
9
8
2
8*4k7
RN12
1
7
6
5
4
RN5
3
2
PIO-Ausgnge
2
PSD1
5
3
14
6
7
4
13
11
10
5
12
13
12
6
11
14
15
7
10
9
2
8
7
6
15
HF-EIN
NT-EIN
RES-F1
RES-F2
NTE
RES-F3
40174
Vcc
+5V
8
9
Signalleitungen
4
5
16
ULN2004A
2
1D
4
IC8
1
2
3
8*10k
R
C1
3
9
CS13
RN13
IC2
1
Vdd
+15V
1
9
3
4
5
6
7
2
1N4148
8
RN7
8*10k
1
GND
D4
1
5
2
6
7
3
14
11
10
4
13
13
12
5
12
14
15
6
11
7
10
1D
8*10k
9
8
7
6
5
4
IC9
2
4
3
3
R
C1
2
9
RN14
IC3
1
CS14
16
ULN2004A
RES-F4
15
RES-F5
REL-NT
RELAIS
RLV
5
STE-EIN
SICHER
40174
8
9
SICHER
GND
Vcc
+5V
GND
Datum
Name
Gezeich. 25-05-92 M.Fritz
68nF
C2
C1
B
68nF
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
Vcc
+5V
Gepr ft
Nr.
RN18=2k2
8-93
MF
nderung
Datum
Name
Gert/UNIT
ICC 200
Benennung/Title
40128-025
LP bs.: 30128-033
Motherboard 200
Blatt
30128-033
LP un.:
GND
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
4 von
5
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
ICC 200
IC7
1
PSD0
Motherboard
30128-033
206 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Vdd
+15V
GND
8*10k
1
9
8
7
6
5
RN3
4
3
2
9
8
7
6
5
4
8*10k
RN10
2
8*10k
9
8
7
6
4
3
1
RN17
5
3
2
2k2
2
4
9
8
6
7
3
Vdd
+15V
5
R12
J23
1
EIN19
R15
IC13
3
Vdd
+15V
GND
14
R17
11
EIN3
7
FUFI-B3
10
9
FUFI-A3
1
Vcc
+5V
9
8
7
2
RN4
8*10k
9
8
5
8*10k
8*10k
1
1
1
9
7
5
4
3
4
2
6
8
5
EIN18
GND
RN1
8*10k
1
Vcc
+5V
RN2
3
7
10
1
RES-B6
4050
Vdd
+15V
9
EIN17
4050
IC5
4050
GND
6
1
RES-B5
6
9
68nF
C20
68nF
C21
6
4050
IC13
680R
EIN4
4050
IC5
1
FING-A3
12
1
FUSS-B2
5
7
FING-B3
GND
11
FUSS-A2
7
R18
680R
4
1
4050
IC13
4
5
GND
6
GND
3
68nF
Vdd
+15V
4050
IC5
4
680R
R19
4
1
FUSS-A2
RN11
3
5
FUSS-B2
4050
IC13
1
2
12
1
C19
R13
EIN2
4050
IC5
680R
680R
J25
2
1
FUSS-B1
3
680R
R16
3
FUSS-A1
2
3
15
1
4050
IC13
6
2
EIN1
4050
IC5
GND
1
EIN20
15
1
FUSS-A1
4050
IC13
68nF
68nF
C16
C17
R11
J24
14
FUSS-B1
1
680R
680R
FuÆschalter 2
IC5
2
8
3
2
680R
R14
2
68nF
C18
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
FuÆschalter 1
RN18
1
1
Vcc
+5V
EIN21
IC1
14
IC6
EIN22
15
14
EIN7
1
4050
IC1
5
4
3
EIN8
12
5
EIN9
1
7
6
11
EIN10
1
9
12
EIN14
1
10
7
EIN11
1
3
EIN13
4050
IC6
6
EIN15
1
FUFI-B3
4050
IC1
RES-B3
4
1
4050
IC6
4050
IC1
RES-B2
EIN6
4050
IC6
4050
IC1
RES-B1
2
1
FING-B1
4050
IC1
11
EIN5
4050
IC6
1
F-ST
EIN23
15
1
FING-A1
4050
IC6
2
9
EIN12
1
10
EIN16
1
FUFI-A3
4050
4050
B
Datum
Name
Gezeich. 25-05-92 M.Fritz
Gepr ft
Nr.
8-93
MF
nderung
Datum
Name
LP bs.: 30128-033
Blatt
Gert/UNIT
ICC 200
Benennung/Title
LP un.: 40128-025
RN18=2k2
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
5 von
5
Motherboard 200
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
30128-033
ICC 200
GND
Vdd
+15V
GND
Motherboard
30128-033
5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
207 / 266
ICC 200
Motherboard (bare)
40128-025
208 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
2
C11
3
RELAIS
J2
R2
D4
R3
SFH450
2
C1
BA159
D1
10nF
D5
1
D2
56R
3
10nF
1N4148
3u3
510R
1nF
3
+
C3
1
C4
GND
J4
R1
150R
C2
D6
1N4148
IC1
D7
11V
1N4148
D3
R4
UE2
680R
Vdd
+15V
1N4148
GND
4
1
2
UE1
+
C8
GND
3
REL1
2
3
REL1
3
1
D8
1N4148
Vdd
+15V
3u3
BA159
D9
3
10:10:32
2
R10
T2
BC517
4k7
SD101A
3
2
1
T1
BC517
4k7
D10
SD101A
2
R11
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
REL1
FING_B1
+24V
J3
1
FING_A1
10nF
1
1
GND
Vdd
+15V
4k7
12
GND
9
2
68nF
10k
C6
1
1
G
Q
10
Q
11
OSC OUT
13
7
2
RX/ CX
5k1
R9
T1
3
5
4011
IC5
4
1
3
&
2
GND
2
FING_A1
T2
IC4
&
9
10
8
11
4011
IC5
9
10
12
4047
1
4013
8
RCX
S
C
D
R
4011
IC5
4528
R6
CX
3
1k
R
CX
6
4
&
5
C9
8
3
IC4
6
R8
+15V
Vdd
6
6
6n8
4
&
4
AST
AST
-TRIG
+TRIG
RTRIG
MR
RX
100pF
IC2
5
R5
GND
Vdd
+15V
IC5
IC3
5
Vdd
+15V
C7
R7
Vdd
+15V
5k1
C
IC1
SFH350
E
Vdd
+15V
T2
T1
B
GND
&
13
S
C
D
R
13
12
FING_B1
11
4013
GND
4011
IC3
11
Vdd
+15V
&
12
C
10
13
GND
GND
Vdd
+15V
15
68nF
C5
0.9
68nF
C10
Vdd
+15V
0.6
GND
14
GND
Datum
Gezeich. 17-02-94
R
CX
9
RX/ CX
Gepr ft
C 3252 s.Aenderungsmit.
14.7.94
Fritz
B 3192 C11=10nF
22.6.94
Fritz
Datum
Name
LP un.:
LP bs.:
14-07-94
Name
Fritz
Hagg
40128-096
30128-358
4528
Nr.
nderung
Blatt
1 von 1
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
Gert/UNIT
ICC 200
Benennung/Title
Mono-Output-Board
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
30128-358
ICC 200
J1
+24V
J5
RELAIS
Mono Output
30128-358
5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
209 / 266
ICC 200
Mono Output (bare)
40128-096
210 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
PCBs
only for ICC 300
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Kleinspannung+Ton
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
Vcc
+5V
J1
GND
ANALOG-1
ANALOG-2
ANALOG-3
ANALOG-4
EIN1
EIN2
EIN3
EIN4
EIN5
EIN6
EIN7
EIN8
EIN9
EIN10
EIN11
PSD7
PSD5
PSD3
PSD1
RESET
Control-Board
J2
QK-Endstufe
Leistungsteil
J4
J3
J5
J6
A1
C1
A1
A1
B1
A1
A1
A2
C2
A2
A2
B2
A2
A2
A3
C3
A3
A3
B3
A3
A3
A4
C4
A4
A4
B4
A4
A4
A5
C5
A5
B5
A6
C6
A6
B6
A7
C7
A7
B7
A8
C8
A5
CS
A6
A7
SET
A8
GND
GND
+24V
+24V
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
Vee
Vdd
+15V -15V
Vcc
+5V
Vcc
+5V
C9
A9
A10
C10
A10
A11
C11
A12
C12
A13
C13
EIN12
A13
ESD3
ESD3
A14
C14
EIN13
A14
ESD4
ESD4
A15
C15
EIN14
A15
ESD5
ESD5
A16
C16
EIN15
A16
ESD6
A17
C17
EIN16
A17
ESD7
A18
C18
EIN17
A18
CS1
A19
C19
EIN18
A19
RESET
A20
C20
EIN19
A20
A21
C21
A21
A22
C22
A22
A23
C23
SICHER
A23
A24
C24
EIN20
A24
A25
C25
EIN21
A25
A26
C26
EIN22
A26
A27
C27
EIN23
A27
A28
C28
PSD6
A28
A29
C29
PSD4
A29
A30
C30
PSD2
A30
A31
C31
PSD0
A31
A32
C32
A9
ESD0
ESD0
A11
ESD1
ESD1
A12
ESD2
ESD2
ESD6
ESD7
RESET
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
U-PRIM
TSI-STE
I-HFL
RES-ANA2
RES-ANA1
IP-PAT
IP-PAT-A
UP-HF
UP-HF-A
A32
U-PHASE
A8
A9
B8
B9
GND
+24V
A5
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
A6
A7
A8
Vcc
+5V
ST-Endstufe
A9
GND
+24V
A5
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
A6
A7
A8
Vcc
+5V
A9
A1
GND
A2
GND
A3
A4
+24V
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
A5
A6
A7
A8
Vcc
+5V
A9
+24V
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
Vcc
+5V
ESD0
A10
A11
ESD1
A11
ESD1
A12
ESD2
A12
ESD2
ESD3
A13
ESD4
A14
ESD4
A15
ESD5
ESD0
A10
A11
ESD1
A12
ESD2
ESD3
A13
ESD4
A14
A15
ESD5
A16
ESD6
A16
ESD6
A17
ESD7
A17
ESD7
A18
NTE
A18
CS6
A19
A19
REL-NT
A19
RESET
A20
A20
TEMP
A21
A21
TSI
A22
A22
A10
B10
ANALOG-1
A10
A11
B11
ANALOG-2
A12
B12
ANALOG-3
A13
B13
ANALOG-4
A13
A14
B14
A14
A15
B15
A15
ESD5
A16
B16
A16
ESD6
A17
B17
SICHER
A17
ESD7
A18
B18
NT-EIN
A18
A19
B19
HF-EIN
A20
B20
STE-EIN
A21
B21
A22
B22
A23
B23
A
A23
A
A23
A24
B24
B
A24
B
A24
A25
B25
AN
A25
AN
A25
A26
B26
AUS
A26
AUS
A26
A27
B27
U-INP
A27
A27
U-INP
A27
A28
B28
U-INT
A28
A28
U-INT
A28
A29
B29
U-NETZT
A29
A29
U-NETZT
A29
A30
B30
U-FUNKE
A30
A30
A30
A31
B31
U-SYM
A31
A31
A31
A32
B32
U-NESSY
A32
A32
A32
A20
TEMP
ESD3
CS7
A21
A22
TSI
ESD0
F-ST
A23
A24
U-PRIM
A25
A26
TSI-STE
24V-TR
24V-TR
A
Datum
Name
Gezeich. 20-07-94 M.Fritz
Gepr ft
20-07-94 M.Hagg
LP un.: 40128-092
LP bs.: 30128-394
Nr.
nderung
Datum
Name
Blatt
1 von 5
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
Gert/UNIT
ICC300
Benennung/Title
Motherboard
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
30128-394
ICC 300
CPU
Motherboard
30128-394
5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
213 / 266
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
A6
A7
A8
A6
A7
A8
Vcc
+5V
A9
A9
A10
ESD0
ESD1
A11
ESD1
A12
ESD2
A12
ESD2
A13
ESD3
A13
ESD3
A14
ESD4
A14
ESD4
ESD5
A15
ESD5
ESD6
A16
ESD6
A17
ESD7
A17
ESD7
PSD0
A18
CS8
A18
CS9
PSD1
A19
RESET
A19
RESET
PSD2
A20
CS10
U-FUNKE
A21
CS11
U-SYM
A22
R1
10k
A16
A22
8*10k
9
8
7
5
4
IC10
DMUX
Vcc
+5V
A15
A21
RN15
1
IC4
ESD0
3
2
C4
GND
RESET
Vcc
+5V
A11
68nF
9
C3
68nF
8*10k
1
8
7
6
GND
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
A10
A20
5
GND
+24V
1
CS
2
3
21
22
PSD3
23
SET
0
1
2
3
C20
4
5
20D 0
6
0
7
G
15 8
3
9
10
EN
11
12
13
14
15
4514
11
1
16
9
2
ULN2004A 15
10
3
14
CS2
8
4
13
CS3
7
5
12
CS4
6
6
11
CS5
5
7
10
RESET
CS1
CS6
4
18
8
9
Vdd
+15V
17
GND
20
19
14
A26
FING-B2
A27
A27
1
16
IP-PAT-A
2
ULN2004A 15
IP-PAT
A28
A29
A29
3
14
CS9
A30
A30
4
13
CS10
A31
A31
5
12
CS11
A32
6
11
CS12
7
10
CS13
A28
A32
13
16
2
R2
10k
15
9
UP-HF
8
FING-A2
A26
7
FING-B1
A25
6
FING-A1
A24
UP-HF-A
5
A23
U-PHASE
A25
4
U-NESSY
A24
3
A23
Vcc
+5V
Ton J2
$wert
A5
Vdd
+15V
1
A5
Vdd
+15V
RN16
A4
+24V
4
GND
A3
A4
Vcc
+5V
RN8
A2
GND
A3
2
A2
3
C24
A1
A1
Vcc
+5V
6
Vcc
+5V
J8
68nF
J7
IC11
8
CS7
CS8
J10 Res.
J10 Res.
9
GND
J28
J57
1
CS13
2
AE1 Bu.
CS14
D26
2
4
5
6
1
2
3
UE1
BA159
D27
BA159
2
Vcc
+5V
AE2 Bu.
3
5
J26
NE Nessy
3
1
2
3
4
8*10k
J58
1
5
1
BA159
J29
AE2 Gen.
6
3
8
BA159
D25
RN9
3
7
D24
2
9
1
AE1 Gen.
A
J27
1
1
2
2
3
3
Datum
Name
Gezeich. 20-07-94 M.Fritz
Gepr ft
NE Bu.
20-07-94 M.Hagg
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
nderung
Datum
Name
Gert/UNIT
ICC300
Benennung/Title
40128-092
LP bs.: 30128-394
Motherboard
Blatt 2 von 5
30128-394
LP un.:
Nr.
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
ICC 300
Refi-Board
Motherboard
30128-394
214 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Senso-Board
+24V
REL1
RLV
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
REL1
D1
J11
1
1N4148
REL1
2
D2
R3
5
6
F1
BR1
J15
u68
22k
C5
Vcc
+5V
C10
C8
GND
0.5
GND
Frontplatte
J10
~
2
BR2
3
24V-TR
+
B250C5000
24V
MASSE
1000uF
-
+
u022
Prim.2
Sek.
1
GND
1
C15
1
GND
Vdd
+15V
~
J22 J18
J12
GND
68nF
+
C7
GND
TR1
Prim.1
1
C32
J14
J19
1
u022
C33
680uF
R9
2
68nF
C11
3
C23
6
1
Gehuse
0.5
68nF
1
Vcc
+5V
+24V
0.5
C9
1
Leistungsteil
22k
+
C6
J16
680uF
R6
~
J20
Vdd
+15V
Vee
-15V
+
BH37933
68nF
-
C22
T200mA
68nF
100R
rot
68nF
~
R5
3k6
J13
1
GND
GND
GND
J21 J17
1
1
A
Datum
Name
Gezeich. 20-07-94 M.Fritz
Gepr ft
20-07-94 M.Hagg
nderung
Datum
Name
Gert/UNIT
ICC300
Benennung/Title
40128-092
LP bs.: 30128-394
Motherboard
Blatt
30128-394
LP un.:
Nr.
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
3 von 5
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
ICC 300
Motherboard
30128-394
5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
215 / 266
1
8*10k
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
9
8
2
8*4k7
RN12
1
7
6
5
RN5
4
3
2
PSD3
PSD4
PSD5
PSD6
1
16
2
ULN2004A 15
3
14
ESD2
4
13
ESD3
5
12
ESD4
6
11
ESD5
7
10
ESD6
ESD0
ESD1
ESD7
PSD7
D8
R10
9
GND
Vdd
+15V
1
9
3
4
5
2
1N4148
6
RESET
7
RN6
D3
8*10k
1
2k2
rot
8
Vcc
+5V
Vdd
+15V
ext. Steuerbus
PSD2
8
PIO-Ausgnge
PSD1
8*10k
9
2
8
7
6
5
IC8
4
R
C1
3
9
RN13
IC2
1
1
16
2
2
ULN2004A 15
HF-EIN
4
5
3
14
NT-EIN
6
7
4
13
RES-F1
11
10
5
12
RES-F2
13
12
6
11
NTE
14
15
7
10
RES-F3
3
1D
40174
Vcc
+5V
8
9
Signalleitungen
CS13
Vdd
+15V
1
9
3
4
5
6
7
2
1N4148
8
RN7
8*10k
1
GND
D4
8*10k
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
CS14
R
C1
2
9
RN14
IC3
1
IC9
2
1
16
4
5
2
ULN2004A 15
6
7
3
14
REL-NT
11
10
4
13
R-BF/CF
13
12
5
12
RLV
14
15
6
11
STE-EIN
7
10
SICHER
3
1D
5
40174
8
RES-F4
RES-F5
9
SICHER
GND
Vcc
+5V
Vcc
+5V
GND
C2
Datum
Name
Gezeich. 20-07-94 M.Fritz
68nF
68nF
C1
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
A
Gepr ft
20-07-94 M.Hagg
LP un.: 40128-092
GND
Nr.
nderung
Datum
Name
LP bs.:
30128-394
Blatt
4 von 5
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
Gert/UNIT
ICC300
Benennung/Title
Motherboard
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
30128-394
ICC 300
IC7
PSD0
Motherboard
30128-394
216 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Vdd
+15V
GND
68nF
14
R17
11
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
RN3
8*10k
9
8
8*10k
1
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
8*10k
8
7
6
4
5
9
EIN1
1
2
EIN2
FUSS-B2
5
FUSS-A2
1
4
EIN3
12
EIN4
6
EIN17
10
EIN18
680R
FUFI-B3
10
FUFI-A3
Vcc
+5V
2
RN4
8*10k
9
8
5
8*10k
8*10k
1
1
1
7
5
4
3
Vcc
+5V
GND
RN1
8*10k
4
2
6
1
4050
1
8
5
9
RES-B6
4050
9
1
1
4050
IC5
8
9
GND
RN2
3
7
7
RES-B5
7
68nF
C20
68nF
C21
6
1
4050
IC13
6
FING-A3
1
4050
IC5
Vdd
+15V
9
11
FUSS-B2
5
7
FING-B3
680R
GND
FUSS-A2
7
R18
680R
4
1
4050
IC13
4
5
GND
6
GND
3
68nF
68nF
C18
Vdd
+15V
4050
IC5
4050
IC13
RN11
3
12
1
EIN20
15
4050
IC5
4
680R
R19
2
3
FUSS-B1
3
1
FUSS-A1
GND
4050
IC13
C19
R13
15
1
1
4050
IC5
4050
IC13
680R
J25
14
FUSS-A1
2
3
GND
FUSS-B1
6
680R
R16
2
Vdd
+15V
IC5
2
1
8
1
68nF
C16
C17
R11
J24
RN10
1
RN17
IC13
3
680R
FuÆschalter 2
3
2
8*2k2
2
4
9
8
6
7
3
EIN19
R15
680R
2
3
Vdd
+15V
9
680R
R14
2
RN18
1
1
5
R12
J23
Vcc
+5V
EIN21
IC1
14
1
IC6
EIN22
15
EIN7
14
FING-A1
4050
IC1
F-ST
5
1
4
EIN8
3
FING-B1
4050
IC1
BF/CF
11
1
RES-B1
7
1
12
EIN9
5
FING-A2
RES-B2
9
1
6
EIN10
11
FING-B2
3
1
1
2
EIN6
1
4
EIN13
1
12
EIN14
6
EIN15
10
EIN16
4050
IC6
10
EIN11
7
FUFI-B3
4050
IC1
RES-B3
EIN5
4050
IC6
4050
IC1
GND
EIN23
15
4050
IC6
4050
IC1
0R
R20
BF/CF
1
4050
IC6
1
4050
IC6
2
EIN12
9
FUFI-A3
4050
1
4050
A
Datum
Name
Gezeich. 20-07-94 M.Fritz
Gepr ft
20-07-94 M.Hagg
LP un.: 40128-092
LP bs.: 30128-394
Nr.
nderung
Datum
Name
Blatt 5 von 5
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
Gert/UNIT
ICC300
Benennung/Title
Motherboard
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
30128-394
ICC 300
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
FuÆschalter 1
GND
Vdd
+15V
GND
Motherboard
30128-394
5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
217 / 266
ICC 300
Motherboard (bare)
40128-092
218 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
2
D18
SD101A
D2
A13
D3
A14
D4
A15
D5
A16
D6
12
GND
9
2
1
D7
A18
G
Q
10
Q
11
OSC OUT
13
14
A19
9
RX/ CX
10
T1
3
5
4
IC4
13
12
&
R23
D7
n.best
D8
n.best
n.best
5k1
4
8
11
10
2
&
S
C
D
R
1
2
4013
IC7
4
9
1
5
2
IC3
&
IC4
4047
3
T2
4011
A20
IC7
6
1
4011
IC4
6
S
C
D
R
4013
11
5
RCX
S
C
D
R
8
13
11
9
12
10
S
C
D
R
13
12
3
4013
A21
GND
4011
A22
10nF
B
E
C
5k1
IC2
SFH350
E
6
&
4011
GND
4528
CX
C6
R4
D13
D11
T2
1k
R
CX
R22
5k1
3
1N4148
C2
15
100pF
8
13
9
FING_A2
A12
STEUERBUS
68nF
D1
R24
D0
A11
10k
C13
A10
6
IC3
8
R21
10
AST
AST
-TRIG
+TRIG
RTRIG
MR
RX
C11
A9
4
&
+15V
Vdd
5
Vcc
+5V
GND
Vdd
+15V
IC4
IC5
12
C7
A8
10nF
R10
GND
11
IC6
6n8
A7
A17
Vee
-15V
Vdd
+15V
Vdd
+15V
GND
Vdd
+15V
Vdd
+15V
680R
Vdd
+15V
R20
GND
8x10k
0R
D9
4k7
R13
D16
1N4148
T2
D20
10:10:32
T6
BC517
A5
A6
3
IC5
4013
GND
A23
FING_A1
5
A24
FING_B1
&
4
A25
B
6
FING_A2
A26
3
FING_B2
+24V
A31
A32
0.6
0.6
GND
GND
Vdd
+15V
GND
Vdd
+15V
1
68nF
A30
0.8
+
Vdd
+15V
A29
C14
A28
3u3
C10
Vdd
+15V
68nF
C12
A27
GND
2
GND
Datum
Name
Gezeich. 10-02-94 M.Fritz
R
CX
7
Gepr ft
14-07-94
M.Hagg
LP un.: 40128-093
RX/ CX
4528
B 3251 s.Anderungsmit.
Nr.
nderung
14-7-94 Fritz
Datum
Name
LP bs.: 30128-352
Blatt 1 von 1
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
Gert/UNIT
ICC
Benennung/Title
RELAIS-BOARD
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
30128-352
FING_B2
GND
SD101A
9
1
2
R18
8
D7
1
3
4k7
D6
Vdd
+15V
1
+24V
A4
REL2
D19
7
SD101A
D5
R16
6
4k7
5
D4
2
FING_A1
A3
4
D3
1
56R
FING_B1
A2
3
D2
SFH450
J4
R5
150R
2
T5
BC517
T1
A1
D1
R25
J1
2
n.best.
MP1
D0
3
2
RN1
R19
15
STEUERBUS
4k7
2
40174
1N4148
14
GND
D14
B
3
D5
IC2
11V
IC1
SFH350
D4
3
+
3u3
R9
5
1
C8
GND
510R
4
GND
C
D3
R15
10k
C5
12
10
1D
1nF
7
13
UE2
1
6
D2
T4
BC547
1
11
D1
Vdd
+15V
2
T3
BC547
10k
D0
1
R6
3
D15
2
10:10:32
T2
BC517
GND
T1
R14
R
C1
1
3
2
GND
STEUERBUS
9
3
IC8
1
+24V
1N4148
REL1
+24V
T1
BC517
R17
3
2
4k7
D17
SD101A
2
n.best
0R
D6
R3
C1
10nF
D3
1N4148
SFH450
D12
D5
1N4148
D2
1N4148
R7
D10
3u3
1N4148
GND
REL2
510R
3
+
REL2
1nF
1
J2
C4
1
C9
2
1
56R
3
10nF
D4
1N4148
IC1
11V
3
J3
R1
150R
C3
D1
1N4148
R8
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
UE1
680R
Vdd
+15V
REL1
ICC 300
R2
REL1
Relay Board
30128-352
5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
219 / 266
ICC 300
Relay Board (bare)
40128-093
220 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
PCBs
only for ICC 350
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Kleinspannung+Ton
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
Vcc
+5V
J1
GND
ANALOG-1
ANALOG-2
ANALOG-3
ANALOG-4
EIN1
EIN2
EIN3
EIN4
EIN5
EIN6
EIN7
EIN8
EIN9
EIN10
EIN11
PSD7
PSD5
PSD3
PSD1
RESET
Control-Board
J2
QK-Endstufe
Leistungsteil
J4
J3
J5
J6
A1
C1
A1
A1
B1
A1
A1
A2
C2
A2
A2
B2
A2
A2
A3
C3
A3
A3
B3
A4
C4
A4
A4
B4
A5
C5
A5
A5
B5
A6
C6
A6
B6
A7
C7
A7
B7
A8
C8
CS
A6
A7
SET
A8
GND
GND
+24V
+24V
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
Vee
Vdd
+15V -15V
Vcc
+5V
Vcc
+5V
C9
A9
A10
C10
A10
A11
C11
A11
ESD1
ESD1
A12
C12
A12
ESD2
ESD2
A13
C13
EIN12
A13
A14
C14
EIN13
A14
ESD4
ESD4
A15
C15
EIN14
A15
ESD5
ESD5
A16
C16
EIN15
A16
ESD6
A17
C17
EIN16
A17
ESD7
A18
C18
EIN17
A18
CS1
A19
C19
EIN18
A19
RESET
A20
C20
EIN19
A20
A21
C21
A21
A22
C22
A22
A23
C23
SICHER
A23
A24
C24
EIN20
A24
A25
C25
EIN21
A25
A26
C26
EIN22
A26
A27
C27
EIN23
A27
A28
C28
PSD6
A28
A29
C29
PSD4
A29
A30
C30
PSD2
A30
A31
C31
PSD0
A31
A32
C32
A9
ESD0
ESD3
ESD0
ESD3
ESD6
ESD7
RESET
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
U-PRIM
TSI-STE
I-HFL
RES-ANA2
RES-ANA1
IP-PAT
IP-PAT-A
UP-HF
UP-HF-A
A32
U-PHASE
A8
A9
B8
B9
GND
GND
A4
A5
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
A6
A7
A8
Vcc
+5V
A9
A1
GND
A4
+24V
A5
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
A6
A7
A8
Vcc
+5V
A9
A2
GND
A3
A3
A3
+24V
ST-Endstufe
A4
+24V
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
A5
A6
A7
A8
Vcc
+5V
A9
+24V
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
Vcc
+5V
ESD0
A10
A11
ESD1
A11
ESD1
A12
ESD2
A12
ESD2
ESD3
A13
ESD4
A14
ESD4
A15
ESD5
ESD0
A10
A11
ESD1
A12
ESD2
ESD3
A13
ESD4
A14
A15
ESD5
A16
ESD6
A16
ESD6
A17
ESD7
A17
ESD7
A18
NTE
A18
CS6
A19
A19
REL-NT
A19
RESET
A20
A20
TEMP
A21
A21
TSI
A22
A22
A10
B10
ANALOG-1
A10
A11
B11
ANALOG-2
A12
B12
ANALOG-3
A13
B13
ANALOG-4
A13
A14
B14
A14
A15
B15
A15
ESD5
A16
B16
A16
ESD6
A17
B17
SICHER
A17
ESD7
A18
B18
NT-EIN
A18
A19
B19
HF-EIN
A20
B20
STE-EIN
A21
B21
A22
B22
A23
B23
A
A23
A
A23
A24
B24
B
A24
B
A24
A25
B25
AN
A25
AN
A25
A26
B26
AUS
A26
AUS
A26
A27
B27
U-INP
A27
A27
U-INP
A27
A28
B28
U-INT
A28
A28
U-INT
A28
A29
B29
U-NETZT
A29
A29
U-NETZT
A29
A30
B30
U-FUNKE
A30
A30
A30
A31
B31
U-SYM
A31
A31
A31
A32
B32
U-NESSY
A32
A32
A32
A20
TEMP
ESD3
CS7
A21
A22
TSI
ESD0
F-ST
A23
A24
U-PRIM
A25
A26
TSI-STE
24V-TR
24V-TR
A
Datum
Name
Gezeich. 27.01.94 M.Fritz
Gepr ft
20-07-94 M.Hagg
40128-092
LP bs.: 30128-351
LP un.:
Nr.
nderung
Datum
Name
Blatt
1 von 6
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
Gert/UNIT
ICC
Benennung/Title
Motherboard
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
30128-351
ICC 350
CPU
Motherboard
30128-351
5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
223 / 266
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
A6
A7
A8
Vcc
+5V
ESD0
A11
ESD1
A11
ESD1
A12
ESD2
A12
ESD2
A13
ESD3
A13
ESD3
A14
ESD4
A14
ESD4
R1
10k
ESD5
A15
ESD6
A16
ESD6
A17
ESD7
A17
ESD7
PSD0
A18
CS8
A18
CS9
PSD1
A19
RESET
A19
RESET
PSD2
PSD3
1
CS
ESD5
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
8*10k
RN15
3
2
C4
68nF
C3
9
8
68nF
8*10k
1
7
6
IC10
DMUX
Vcc
+5V
A16
A15
GND
IC4
A10
Vdd
+15V
RESET
Vcc
+5V
A9
ESD0
A10
5
GND
+24V
A5
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
2
GND
A4
+24V
Vdd
+15V
Vcc
+5V
RN8
GND
A3
A3
4
A2
GND
3
A1
A2
A4
C24
J8
A1
Vcc
+5V
68nF
J7
Vcc
+5V
2
3
21
22
0
1
2
3
C20
4
5
20D 0
6
0
7
G
15 8
3
9
10
EN
11
12
13
14
15
4514
11
1
16
9
2
ULN2004A 15
10
3
14
CS2
8
4
13
CS3
7
5
12
CS4
6
6
11
CS5
5
7
10
RESET
CS1
CS6
4
18
8
9
Vdd
+15V
17
A20
CS10
A21
U-FUNKE
A21
CS11
A22
U-SYM
A22
A23
U-NESSY
A23
FING-A1
A24
U-PHASE
A24
FING-B1
UP-HF-A
A25
FING-A2
A26
UP-HF
A26
A27
A27
1
16
IP-PAT-A
2
ULN2004A 15
IP-PAT
A28
A29
A29
3
14
CS9
A30
A30
4
13
CS10
A31
A31
5
12
CS11
A32
A32
6
11
CS12
7
10
CS13
A28
10k
FING-B2
1
15
$wert
9
8
7
16
6
13
5
14
4
R2
19
RN16
Vcc
+5V
GND
20
3
A25
23
SET
2
A20
Ton J2
IC11
8
CS7
CS8
J10 Res.
J10 Res.
9
GND
J9
ESD2
ESD3
ESD4
ESD5
5
ESD6
ESD7
RESET
CS11
CS12
CS13
RES-ANA1
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
RES-ANA2
GND
Vdd
+15V
Vcc
+5V
CS13
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
FING-B3
17
18
RES-B1
19
20
RES-B2
21
22
RES-B3
23
24
RES-B4
25
26
RES-B5
27
28
RES-B6
29
30
RES-F1
31
32
RES-F2
33
34
RES-F3
35
36
RES-F4
37
38
39
40
8*10k
2
CS14
9
3
8
4
7
-15V
+24V Vee
5
6
6
4
5
7
2
3
FING-A3
1
ESD0
ESD1
+24V
1
9
-15V
Vee
8
Vdd
+15V
RN9
GND
Vcc
+5V
Vcc
+5V
A
Datum
Name
Gezeich. 27.01.94 M.Fritz
20-07-94 M.Hagg
Gepr ft
RES-F6
nicht bestueckt
Nr.
nderung
Datum
Name
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
Gert/UNIT
ICC
Benennung/Title
LP un.:
40128-092
LP bs.: 30128-351
Motherboard
Blatt
30128-351
2 von 6
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
ICC 350
Refi-Board
Motherboard
30128-351
224 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Senso-Board
+24V
REL1
RLV
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
REL1
D1
J11
1
1N4148
REL1
2
D2
R3
5
6
3k6
F1
BR1
J15
u68
22k
C5
~
BR2
GND
C10
C8
Frontplatte
J10
3
24V-TR
-
+
B250C5000
24V
MASSE
1000uF
u022
Prim.2
Sek.
1
Vcc
+5V
GND
2
+
1
GND
0.5
1
C15
J12
GND
Vdd
+15V
~
J22 J18
GND
68nF
+
C7
GND
TR1
Prim.1
1
u022
C33
J14
J19
1
C32
680uF
R9
2
68nF
C11
3
C23
6
1
Gehuse
0.5
68nF
1
Vcc
+5V
+24V
0.5
C9
1
Leistungsteil
22k
+
C6
J16
680uF
R6
~
J20
Vdd
+15V
Vee
-15V
+
BH37933
68nF
-
C22
T200mA
68nF
100R
rot
68nF
~
R5
J13
1
GND
GND
GND
J21 J17
1
1
A
Datum
Name
Gezeich. 27.01.94 M.Fritz
Gepr ft
20-07-94 M.Hagg
nderung
Datum
Name
Gert/UNIT
ICC
Benennung/Title
40128-092
LP bs.: 30128-351
Motherboard
Blatt
30128-351
LP un.:
Nr.
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
3 von 6
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
ICC 350
Motherboard
30128-351
5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
225 / 266
1
8*10k
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
9
8
2
8*4k7
RN12
1
7
6
5
4
RN5
3
2
PSD3
PSD4
PSD5
PSD6
1
16
2
ULN2004A 15
3
14
ESD2
4
13
ESD3
5
12
ESD4
6
11
ESD5
7
10
ESD6
ESD0
ESD1
ESD7
PSD7
D8
R10
9
GND
Vdd
+15V
1
9
3
4
5
2
1N4148
6
RESET
7
RN6
D3
8*10k
1
2k2
rot
8
Vcc
+5V
Vdd
+15V
ext. Steuerbus
PSD2
8
PIO-Ausgnge
PSD1
8*10k
9
2
8
7
6
5
IC8
4
R
C1
3
9
1
16
2
2
ULN2004A 15
HF-EIN
4
5
3
14
NT-EIN
6
7
4
13
RES-F1
11
10
5
12
RES-F2
13
12
6
11
NTE
14
15
7
10
RES-F3
3
1D
40174
Vcc
+5V
8
9
Signalleitungen
CS13
RN13
IC2
1
Vdd
+15V
1
9
3
4
5
6
7
2
1N4148
8
RN7
8*10k
1
GND
D4
8*10k
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
CS14
R
C1
2
9
RN14
IC3
1
IC9
2
1
16
4
5
2
ULN2004A 15
6
7
3
14
REL-NT
11
10
4
13
R-BF/CF
13
12
5
12
RLV
14
15
6
11
STE-EIN
7
10
SICHER
3
1D
5
40174
8
RES-F4
RES-F5
9
SICHER
GND
Vcc
+5V
GND
C2
Datum
Name
Gezeich. 27.01.94 M.Fritz
68nF
68nF
A
C1
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
Vcc
+5V
Gepr ft
20-07-94 M.Hagg
LP un.: 40128-092
GND
LP bs.: 30128-351
Nr.
nderung
Datum
Name
Blatt
4 von 6
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
Gert/UNIT
ICC
Benennung/Title
Motherboard
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
30128-351
ICC 350
IC7
PSD0
Motherboard
30128-351
226 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Vdd
+15V
GND
68nF
14
R17
11
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
RN3
8*10k
9
8
8*10k
1
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
8*10k
9
8
7
6
4
5
12
1
EIN1
1
2
EIN2
4
EIN3
12
EIN4
6
EIN17
10
EIN18
4050
IC5
FUSS-B2
5
FUSS-A2
1
680R
FUFI-B3
10
FUFI-A3
9
RES-B6
Vcc
+5V
2
RN4
8*10k
9
8
7
8*10k
8*10k
1
1
7
5
4
3
Vcc
+5V
GND
RN1
8*10k
4
2
6
1
4050
9
1
4050
1
8
5
1
4050
IC5
8
9
GND
RN2
3
7
RES-B5
7
68nF
C20
68nF
C21
6
1
4050
IC13
Vdd
+15V
7
1
4050
IC5
6
FING-A3
680R
9
11
FUSS-B2
5
7
FING-B3
GND
FUSS-A2
1
R18
680R
4
1
4050
IC13
4
5
GND
6
GND
3
68nF
68nF
C18
Vdd
+15V
4050
IC5
4050
IC13
5
3
3
FUSS-B1
4
680R
R19
2
FUSS-A1
GND
RN11
1
15
1
EIN20
15
4050
IC5
4050
IC13
C19
R13
1
4050
IC13
680R
J25
14
FUSS-A1
3
3
GND
FUSS-B1
2
680R
R16
2
Vdd
+15V
IC5
2
1
6
1
68nF
C16
C17
R11
J24
RN10
1
RN17
IC13
3
680R
FuÆschalter 2
3
2
8*2k2
2
4
9
8
6
7
3
EIN19
R15
680R
8
3
2
2
Vdd
+15V
9
680R
R14
RN18
1
1
5
R12
J23
Vcc
+5V
EIN21
IC1
14
1
IC6
EIN22
15
EIN7
14
FING-A1
1
4050
IC1
F-ST
5
1
4
EIN8
3
FING-B1
1
4050
IC1
BF/CF
11
1
7
1
12
EIN9
5
FING-A2
9
1
6
EIN10
1
11
FING-B2
3
1
EIN6
4
EIN13
1
12
EIN14
6
EIN15
10
EIN16
4050
IC6
10
EIN11
7
FUFI-B3
4050
IC1
RES-B3
2
4050
IC6
4050
IC1
RES-B2
EIN5
4050
IC6
4050
IC1
RES-B1
EIN23
15
4050
IC6
1
4050
IC6
2
EIN12
9
FUFI-A3
4050
1
4050
A
Datum
Name
Gezeich. 27.01.94 M.Fritz
Gepr ft
20-07-94 M.Hagg
LP un.: 40128-092
LP bs.: 30128-351
Nr.
nderung
Datum
Name
Blatt 5 von 6
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
Gert/UNIT
ICC
Benennung/Title
Motherboard
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
30128-351
ICC 350
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
FuÆschalter 1
GND
Vdd
+15V
GND
Motherboard
30128-351
5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
228 / 266
1
D24
2
2
3
AE1 Bu.
3
BA159
D25
BA159
J29
J58
1
1
D26
2
AE2 Bu.
2
4
5
6
2
3
UE1
BA159
D27
1
3
BA159
3
+24V
J26
1
2
2
3
3
REL2
NE Bu.
R-BF/CF
D12
u022
Vdd
+15V
Vdd
+15V
1N4148
D23
C26
3 +
7
5
1
1N4148
IC14 OFF
LF356
R24
BF/CF
1N4148
4
2k2
R21
220R
C27
3M3
GND
GND
GND
GND
68nF
C29
C28
u15
D11
BA159
BA159
1k2
D10
R25
100k
10nF
R8
D6
D7
10V
10V
C13
68R
D9
R23
6
3 +
-
10k
1k/1W
L1
R4
1N4148
RES-F5
-+
R20
R7
I-HFL
D22
2
u15
TP1
D5
1
REL2
-
IC12
TL082
rot
GND
10k
R22
REL2
2
68nF
R74
3k6
1uF
C31
1
u022
C30
NE Nessy
J27
330k
C25
AE2 Gen.
GND
Vee
-15V
GND
C12
5
68nF
Vdd
+15V
8
+
6
-
IC12
TL082
IC12
TL082
C14
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
68nF
GND
4
7
5 +
GND
Vee
-15V
A
Datum
Name
Gezeich. 27.01.94 M.Fritz
Gepr ft
20-07-94 M.Hagg
LP un.: 40128-092
LP bs.: 30128-351
Nr.
nderung
Datum
Name
Blatt
6 von 6
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
Gert/UNIT
ICC
Benennung/Title
Motherboard
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
30128-351
ICC 350
J57
1
/ 266
Motherboard
30128-351
228
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
J28
AE1 Gen.
ICC 350
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
Motherboard (bare)
40128-092
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
229 / 266
A12
D2
A13
D3
A14
D4
A15
D5
A16
D6
A17
D7
8
STEUERBUS
12
GND
9
2
1
A18
68nF
D1
R24
D0
A11
10k
C13
A10
6
13
15
G
Q
10
Q
11
OSC OUT
13
14
A19
D18
SD101A
RX/ CX
T1
6
5
4
12
&
5
4
T2
IC3
&
5
&
8
11
9
FING_B1
4
10
S
C
D
R
3
+24V
0.8
A31
0.6
0.6
GND
GND
GND
Vdd
+15V
1
68nF
A30
Vdd
+15V
68nF
C12
A29
+
Vdd
+15V
C14
A28
3u3
C10
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
Vdd
+15V
GND
2
GND
7
Datum
Name
Gepr ft
14-07-94
M.Hagg
LP un.: 40128-093
RX/ CX
4528
B 3251 s.Anderungsmit.
Nr.
nderung
14-7-94 Fritz
Datum
Name
D7
n.best
D8
IC7
8
11
9
12
GND
Gezeich. 10-02-94 M.Fritz
R
CX
2
4013
13
4013
B
6
FING_B2
A27
A32
&
FING_A2
A26
1
10
S
C
D
R
13
12
3
4011
A25
S
C
D
R
4
IC5
A24
3
2
A21
5
n.best
IC7
6
1
4011
2
1
S
C
D
R
4013
11
4011
IC4
4047
FING_A1
n.best
R4
R23
5k1
E
3
13
IC4
A20
A23
C6
B
C
IC2
SFH350
R20
10
5
RCX
A22
0R
D9
D13
1N4148
D11
1N4148
6
&
4011
IC4
GND
4528
CX
10nF
10nF
680R
R10
R9
C5
1nF
510R
B
D20
9
R22
5k1
3
9
1k
R
CX
IC3
8
R21
10
AST
AST
-TRIG
+TRIG
RTRIG
MR
RX
FING_A2
A9
4
LP bs.: 30128-352
Blatt 1 von 1
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
4013
GND
Gert/UNIT
ICC
Benennung/Title
RELAIS-BOARD
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
30128-352
FING_B2
5
Vcc
+5V
C7
A8
&
12
6n8
A7
IC6
GND
Vdd
+15V
IC4
IC5
11
Vdd
+15V
Vee
-15V
Vdd
+15V
T2
C2
Vdd
+15V
A5
A6
4k7
R13
D16
1N4148
GND
8x10k
+24V
GND
5k1
D7
9
E
8
Vdd
+15V
IC1
SFH350
D6
1
GND
1
Vdd
+15V
C
7
1
SD101A
D5
Vdd
+15V
R18
6
4k7
5
D4
GND
A3
A4
REL2
D19
4
D3
10:10:32
T6
BC517
FING_A1
A2
3
D2
SFH450
2
3
FING_B1
A1
D1
RN1
3
2
T5
BC517
C11
J1
2
3
2
D14
1
56R
2
100pF
MP1
D0
IC2
11V
J4
R5
150R
T2
STEUERBUS
SD101A
15
40174
R16
14
3u3
GND
4k7
D5
3
+
10k
T1
2
+15V
Vdd
5
3
1
12
4
D4
UE2
1
C8
GND
n.best.
13
D3
Vdd
+15V
T4
BC547
GND
R25
D2
R6
3
D15
T3
BC547
R15
R19
7
10
1D
4k7
6
1
11
D1
1
2
2
10k
D0
10:10:32
T2
BC517
GND
T1
R14
R
C1
1
3
2
GND
STEUERBUS
9
3
IC8
1
+24V
1N4148
REL1
+24V
T1
BC517
R17
3
2
4k7
D17
SD101A
2
n.best
C1
R3
0R
D6
D3
1N4148
D12
SFH450
1N4148
D2
1N4148
D10
R7
1N4148
3u3
510R
GND
REL2
C4
3
+
REL2
1nF
1
J2
D5
2
10nF
C3
10nF
D4
IC1
11V
1N4148
D1
1N4148
R8
680R
UE1
1
C9
1
56R
3
3
2
J3
R1
150R
ICC 350
Vdd
+15V
REL1
Relay Board
30128-352
230 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
R2
REL1
ICC 350
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
Relay Board (bare)
40128-093
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
231 / 266
A20
T3
BUX84
NEG15
1
220k
3
R15
10k
R3
1k
R8
27k
R22
2
3
X0303
R6
27k
TY1
R39
2
D2
3
3
MP4
NE
REL2
REL2
NULL
2
FRES
1k5
D7
10k
7
-
NULL
6
MP1
+
IC3
TL082
1
4
3
3 +
7
R24
CS13
IC4
-
TL082
IC6
NULL
A22
TP1
A25
A26
A27
RT
CT
Fout
1
U
F
CT
-
I-FREQ
U-STEUER
DGND
1
T4
BUX84
2
AD654
5
10k
I-NEURO
A24
6
Vin
D13
POS15
8
2
5 +
CLR
10k
10k
R23
3
BA159
9V1
R21
NULL
NULL
A28
A29
A30
A31
A32
J2
1
J2-1
2
J2-2
3
1
J2-5
MP5
IC1
78xx
7815
D11
I
BA159
O
3
POS15
4
1
I
79xx
7915
O
3
MP3
NEG15
Gezeich.
1uF
+
C11
+
5
D12
IC3
TL082
C
G
2
J2-5
68nF
MP2
C3
100nF
100nF
2
100uF
C1
100uF
C2
+
C9
C10
8
+
NULL
BA159
POS15
G
1uF
J2-5
+
NULL
5
C12
4
Datum
Name
M.Fritz 14-06-93
Gepr ft
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
Gert/UNIT
ICC
Benennung/Title
NEG15
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
30128-070
LP bs.: 40128-027
LP un.:
IC2
Nr.
J5
1
R14
R13
A21
A23
T2
BUX84
2
RESET
1
3
CS12
A19
2
R7
ESD7
A18
R5
470R
AE
390R
ESD6
A17
D1
1N4148
7
C14
ESD5
A16
IC3
TL082
5 +
0u33
ESD4
A15
R38
10k
A14
R2
ESD3
T5
BC557
10k
ESD2
A13
NULL
3
1
ESD1
A12
2
R12
A11
T1
BUX84
1k
390R
ESD0
1
2
3
8k2
-
R19
FTEST
0u047
A10
1k5
R1
+
~
Vcc
+5V
NEG15
1N4148
C13
A9
10k
9V1
A8
D6
A7
R9
REL1
62mA
6
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
R4
A6
J2-2
+24V
220R
A5
820k
C8
A4
2
+
B250C800
10uF
GND
A3
1
~
A1
A2
J4
1
REL1
F1
R36=3k3
14.6.93
MF
nderung
Datum
Name
Blatt
1 von 2
Neurotest-Board
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
30128-070
ICC 350 Neurotest
BR1
Neurotest Board
30128-070
232 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
MP9
J2-1
MP6
J1
R29
IC7
16
8
1
-
CS12
IC13
ESD0
ESD1
ESD2
ESD3
ESD4
ESD5
11
1
7
2
13
12
3
14
4
5
4
13
3
2
5
12
14
15
7
10
6
11
1D
40174
16
ULN2004A
8
9
1
8
3k3
3k3
R16
3k3
R18
IC8
16
1k3
10
6
15
Vdd
+15V
R32
10
13
CNY66
IC9
12
16
9
1
8
11
1k3
Vdd
+15V
R33
CNY66
IC10
9
D5
CNY66
Vdd
+15V
R31
R
C1
9
R25
16
IC6
TL082
D3
1
3 +
R10
IC14
1
POS15
IC5
16
+
BCD/DEC 0
1
2
1
3
2
4
4
5
8
6
7
8
9
3
14
2
1N4148
D8
13k
R27
1N4148
D9
7k5
R28
1N4148
D10
4k3
R17
1N4148
D4
2k4
1N4148
NEG15
15
1
6
7
4
CLR
9
FRES
5
FTEST
-
4028
9
30k
R26
U-STEUER
1N4148
R11
GND
RESET
2
NULL
I-FREQ
220k
9
3k3
R20
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
I-NEURO
1k3
R36
POS15
3k3
MP7
8
GND
1k3
NULL
1N4148
+24V
D15
REL1
1
8
Vdd
+15V
R34
CNY66
IC11
16
9
1
8
POS15
1k3
Vdd
+15V
R35
9
2k2
1
R30
CNY66
IC12
16
D16
REL2
8
8k2
1N4148
NULL
rot
4
C
Gezeich.
68nF
IC6
TL082
C7
68nF
68nF
C6
C5
68nF
C4
Vdd
+15V
D14
8
+
NULL
R37
POS15
1k5
CNY66
Datum
Name
M.Fritz 14-06-93
Gepr ft
GND
LP un.:
NEG15
Nr.
R36=3k3
14.6.93
MF
nderung
Datum
Name
LP bs.:
Blatt
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
Gert/UNIT
ICC
Benennung/Title
30128-070
40128-027
2 von 2
Neurotest-Board
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
30128-070
ICC 350 Neurotest
Vdd
+15V
Neurotest Board
30128-070
5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
233 / 266
ICC 350 Neurotest
Neurotest Board
40128-027
234 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
Vdd
+15V
A1
Vdd
+15V
UE1
A2
GND
2
68nF
R1
C6
3
Vcc
+5V
A9
3
10:10
A8
R2
A10
ESD0
2
T1
BC517
A11
ESD1
A14
ESD4
A15
GND
100R
SFH450
L1
1m8
R7
1
ESD3
2u2
D1
A13
2V7
C5
ESD2
IC1
+
1k
A12
J3
1
C3
2
u15
R3
A7
1k
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
A6
68nF
1
A5
C4
+24V
1u5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
A4
C2
A3
GND
100R
ESD5
GND
A16
ESD6
A17
ESD7
A18
CS12
A19
RESET
A20
CS13
A21
Zur Fernbedienungsbuchse
A23
F-IIST
Vdd
+15V
A24
A25
F-INTENS
A26
J4
1
Vdd
+15V
GND 2
3
Vdd
+15V
C
A22
4
IC2
B
IC1
SFH350
A29
7
A31
3
2
FING-NEU
1
A32
6
1
4050
IC2
IC2
E
A30
1k
5
R4
LED-FERN
A28
10k
R6
A27
9
10
22k
C1
u47
R5
1
4050
IC2
5
4
1N4148
1
GND
GND
GND
Vcc
+5V
Vdd
+15V
-15V
Vee
+24V
J2
11
GND
D2
4050
4050
IC2
D3
12
1
rot
4050
IC2
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
FING-A3
15
16
FING-B3
17
18
F-IIST
19
20
FING-NEU
21
22
F-INTENS
23
24
RES-B4
25
26
RES-B5
27
28
RES-B6
29
30
LED-FERN
31
32
RES-F2
33
34
RES-F3
36
RES-F4
-15V
+24V Vee
Vdd
+15V
14
Vcc
+5V
15
1
GND
ESD0
ESD1
ESD2
ESD3
ESD4
ESD5
ESD6
ESD7
RESET
CS11
CS12
CS13
RES-ANA1
RES-ANA2
35
37
38
39
40
4050
B
Datum
Gezeich. M.Fritz
Name
15.10.92
Gepr ft
RES-F6
40128-028
LP bs.: 30128-071
Blatt 1 von 1
LP un.:
Nr.
nderung
Datum
Name
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
Gert/UNIT
ICC
Benennung/Title
Neurotest-Motherboard
ZMK
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
30128-071
ICC 350 Neurotest
J1
Motherboard Neurotest
30128-071
5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
235 / 266
ICC 350 Neurotest
Motherboard Neurotest (bare)
40128-028
236 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
5k
TP2
5 +
TL082
IC1
3
J6
2
1
3
5k
NE
J2
2
1
3 +
TL082
IC1
RES-ANA1
7
-
A20
GND
C14
GND
4k7
R8
GND
GND
8
5
6
C10
Vee
-15V
U_KENN
1
2
GND
68nF
22nF
1
GND
GND
GND
1
2
J5
3
1
2
J4
J3
A22
3
1
3
2
CS11
A21
2
TL084
IC3
20k
C11
D10
RESET
1N4148
R27
J11
CS12
A19
3 +
-
1nF
4
P6KE18CA
ESD7
A18
2k4
-+
12k
J9
4k7
R24
J10
ESD6
A17
68nF
IC2 B/C1 C2
LM318 B/C3
R10
A16
C1
R11
1uF
220pF
15:15
UE1
J8
ESD5
C3
ESD4
MP1
D9
100R
7
ESD3
A15
15k
2
C7
1
C15
R35
2k7
GND
3 +
Vdd
+15V
R25
1
C2
2
A13
A14
R26
R9
1nF
ESD2
GND
2k4
A12
2k7
GND
2k4
R12
D11
P6KE18CA
REL6
ESD1
REL5
ESD0
A11
REL4
A10
REL3
REL2
REL1
Vcc
+5V
4k7
R34
R33
GND
UE2
A8
A9
10k
R21
REL6
REL5
REL4
A7
REL2
REL1
Vee
Vdd -15V
+15V
A6
REL3
+24V
A5
RES-ANA2
1
2
4k7
OSZ_OUT
J13
A4
R32
A3
Vdd
+15V
R7
Vdd
+15V
J12
GND
6
4k7
A2
10k
R22
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
A1
TP1
AE
MASSE
J1
15:15
1uF
A23
3
3
A24
A25
A26
A1
T3
BS170
2
A2
T2
BS170
2
1
A27
A28
MP2
1
R15
GND
GND
A29
2k
+24V
A30
TRANS_1
C5
R18
A31
R16
R29
R30
R14
R13
RES-ANA1
OSZ_OUT
A32
22k
ESD3
ESD4
ESD5
A1
12
A2
3
2
14
15
ESD3
ESD4
ESD5
CS12
4
1
Vdd
+15V
R31
7
CS11
8
22k
9
RESET
22k
gelb
D6
rot
D5
rot
D8
Ventil
Vee
-15V
1.0
GND
D
6
4
REL7
OSZI_ON
1
8
+
+
5
68nF
R19
2k
R6
2k
R5
2k
2k
R4
D4
2
Vdd
+15V
3
4
BA159
REL6
REL5
REL4
REL3
R3
2k
R1
C6
TRANS_1
Vdd
+15V
68nF
ESD2
3
5
T1
BS170
RN1
IC3
TL084
11
ESD1
GND
GND
C9
ESD0
0.7
2
GND
40174
2
rot
OSZI_ON
5
13
rot
4
D3
10
Vee
-15V
68nF
ESD2
GND
3
0.7
J7
1
+24V
7
1D
11
D2
ESD1
6
GND
rot
ESD0
9
9
C8
CS11
R
C1
2k
8
1
R2
40174
IC5
RESET
Vdd
+15V
REL7
+24V
C13
10
2k4
7
Vdd
+15V
2k4
11
GND
1nF
12
6
14
12 +
GND
1nF
R28
13
5
10
R17
4
7
11
-
IC3
TL084
7
5 +
C4
12
6
390R
13
IC3
TL084
C12
13
15
2k4
-
10k
14
16
ULN2004A
2k4
6
10k
3
22nF
2
5
1D
2k
ESD5
1
15
4
D1
ESD4
2
14
rot
ESD3
3
R20
ESD2
2k4
8
10 +
D7
ESD1
5k6
-
IC3
TL084
IC4
ESD0
22nF
9
R
C1
9
R23
CS12
1
REL2
IC6
RESET
REL1
REL7
RES-ANA2
Name
M.Fritz
Gepr ft
IC1
TL082
4
Datum
Gezeich. 28-05-93
D 4015
D10,D11 neu
10.12.96
Fritz
C 3107
R17=2k4
30.4.94
Fritz
Datum
Name
Nr.
nderung
Gert/UNIT
ICC
Benennung/Title
40128-064
LP bs.: 30128-200
LP un.:
Blatt
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
1 von 1
MIC-Board
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
30128-200
ICC 350 MIC-MIEN-DOKU
U_KENN
MIC Board
30128-200
5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
237 / 266
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
ICC 350 MIC-MIEN-DOKU
MIC Board (bare)
40128-064
238 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
J11
F10
1
3
3
A
Datum
Gezeich.
01-12-97
E.Werner
Name
Gepr ft
01-12-97
E.Werner
nderung
Datum
Name
Diese Zeichnung
ist urheberrechtlich gesch tzt,
daher
Weitergabe und Vervielfltigung
ohne unsere Genehmigung
unzulssig
Gert/UNIT
ICC 350 MMH Doku
Benennung/Title
40128-141
LP bs.: 30128-661
Protection-Board
Blatt 1 von 1
30128-661
LP un.:
Nr.
D103
1N5373
D108
NS2004
NS2004
D107
D101
1N5383
C100
0.01uF
D105
Bruecke
D102
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
D104
Bruecke
1N5383
1
J10
NS2004
D109
D106
NS2004
2
2
250mA
Zeichnungsnummer/DWG.NO
ICC 350 MIC-MIEN-DOKU
Protection Board
30128-661
5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Art. No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
239 / 266
5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
ICC 350 MIC-MIEN-DOKU
Protection Board (bare)
40128-141
240 / 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Appendix
A
Part Numbers
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ICC 200 (D)
10128-002/-010/-023
50502-059
30128-060
30121-025
40128-103
30121-023
30128-065
30121-195
30128-056
51501-167
Art.-No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
51501-167
30121-086
30128-063
A
APPENDIX A
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
51601-056
50610-009
51611-051
(Fuses)
51031-043 (Pot.)
51501-190 (button)
-191
-192
51603-000
(cpl.)
243 / 266
ICC 200 (UL)
10128-202/-204/-205
30128-458
50502-069
30128-725
30128-727
30128-728
(cpl.)
30128-065 30128-056
51501-167
30128-691
(pin)
51501-167
40128-103
30121-086
30128-063
244
/ 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
51601-056
50610-009
51611-100 (Fuses)
51031-043
51501-190
51501-191
51501-192
51603-000 (cpl.)
A
APPENDIX A
ICC 200 (INT)
10128-009/-015/-036
30128-458
30128-725
50502-059
30128-691
(pin)
51501-167
30128-727
30128-065
30128-728
30128-056
51501-167
Art.-No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
40128-103
30121-086
30128-063
A
APPENDIX A
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
51601-056
50610-009
51611-051 (Fuses)
51031-043 (Pot.)
51501-190 (Button, cpl.)
-191
-192
51603-000
245 / 266
ICC 200 (F)
10128-051/-054/-056
30128-116
50502-059
51501-167
30121-025
40128-112
30121-023
30128-065
30128-056
51601-056
30128-063
246
30121-086
/ 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
50610-009
30121-195
51501-167
51611-051
51031-043
51501-190
51501-191
51501-192
51603-000
A
APPENDIX A
ICC 200
Leiterplattenanordnung
Art.-Nr. 80116-200
09 / 2004
40128-103
40128-112 (F)
A
ANHANG A
245
/ 264
ICC 300 (D)
10128-070, -071
51501-167
40128-133
30128-313
50502-059
30121-086
30121-025
30128-022
30127-011
248
/ 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
30121-390
30128-021
30121-023
30121-023
50610-009
51501-167
30121-195
51031-043 (Pot.)
51603-000
51501-190
51611-051
-191
(Fuse)
-192
51601-025
A
APPENDIX A
ICC 300 (UL)
10128-213, -214
51501-167
30128-419
30128-691
(Pin)
40128-133
30128-021
30121-390
30128-726
51501-167
30128-728
Art.-No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
50502-069
30128-725
30121-086
30128-022
30127-011
A
APPENDIX A
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
50610-009
51601-025
51031-043
51501-190
-191
-192
51611-100
(Fuses)
51603-000
249 / 266
ICC 300 (INT)
10128-077, -078
51501-167
30128-419
50502-059
30121-086
30128-725
30128-691
30128-022
30127-011
250
/ 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
40128-133
30121-390
30128-021
30128-726
50610-009
51601-025
51501-167
30128-728
51603-000
51031-043
51501-190
51611-051
-191
(Fuse)
-192
A
APPENDIX A
ICC 300 (F)
10128-072, -073
51501-167
30128-315
40128-134
30121-025
30128-021
30121-023
30121-390
30121-023
51501-167
30121-195
0Art.-No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
50502-059
30121-086
30128-022
30127-011
A
APPENDIX A
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
50610-009
51601-025
51031-043
51501-190
-191
-192
51603-000
51611-051
251 / 266
ICC 300
Leiterplattenanordnung
40128-133 (D/INT)
40128-134 (F)
250
/ 264
A
ANHANG A
ICC 350 (D)
10128-016 (Endo)
50502-059
30121-025
30121-023
30128-021
30121-023
40128-101
30121-195
30121-390
Art.-No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
30128-016
51501-167
30127-011
30121-086
A
APPENDIX A
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
30128-022
50610-009
51601-025
51031-043
51501-190
51501-191
51501-192
51611-051
51501-167
51603-000
253 / 266
ICC 350 (UL)
10128-200, -206 (Endo)
30128-725
50502-069
30128-441
40128-101
30128-726
30128-021
30128-728
30121-390
30128-691
51501-167
30127-011
30121-086
254
/ 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
30128-022
50610-009
51601-025
51031-043
51501-190
51501-191
51501-192
51611-100
(Fuses)
A
51603-000
APPENDIX A
ICC 350 (INT)
10128-061 (Endo)
30128-725
50502-059
30128-726
40128-101
30128-021
30128-441
30128-728
30121-390
Art.-No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
30128-691
51501-167
30127-011
30121-086
A
APPENDIX A
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
30128-022
50610-009
51601-025
51031-043
51501-190
51501-191
51501-192
51611-051
51501-167
51603-000
255 / 266
ICC 350 (F)
10128-055 (Endo), -082 (MIC)
30121-025
50502-059
30128-080
30128-679 (MIC)
30121-023
30128-021
30121-023
30121-195
40128-110
30121-390
30128-668
30121-431
51708-043
51501-167
30127-011
50610-009
30121-086
51604-035
256
/ 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
30128-022
30128-680 (MIC)
51031-043
51501-190
51501-191
51501-192
51611-051
(Fuses)
51501-167
51603-000
A
APPENDIX A
ICC 350 M-Doku
10128-081
50502-059
30121-025
30121-023
40128-101
30128-021
30121-390
30128-668
30121-195
Art.-No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
30128-533
30121-023
51501-167
51708-043
30121-086
A
30127-011
APPENDIX A
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
51601-025
50610-009
50600-021
51031-043
30128-671
51501-190
51501-191/-192
51603-000
51611-051
51501-167
257 / 266
ICC 350 Z
10128 -065
50502-059
30121-025
30128-083
30128-085
30121-086
51501-167
258
30121-023
30128-021
30127-011
51604-035
/ 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
30121-023
40128-101
30121-195
30121-431
30121-390
50610-009
51601-025
51031-043
51501-190
51501-191
51501-192
51611-051
51501-167
51603-000
A
APPENDIX A
ICC 350 T
10128-066
50502-059
30121-025
30128-089
30121-023
40128-101
30121-195
30121-390
Art.-No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
30128-021
30121-023
51501-167
A
30128-085
30127-011
30121-086
51604-035
APPENDIX A
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
50610-009
51601-025
51031-043
51501-190
51501-191
51501-192
51611-051
51501-167
51603-000
259 / 266
ICC 350 M (INT)
10128-083, -310
30128-725
50502-059
30128-606
30128-726
40128-101 30121-390
30128-021
30128-668
30128-728
30128-691
51501-167
51708-043
30121-086
260
30127-011
/ 266
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
51601-025
50610-009
51031-043
30128-204
51501-190
51501-191
51501-192
51603-000
51611-051
A
51501-167
APPENDIX A
ICC 350 M
10128-080
50502-059
30121-025
30128-021
30121-023
40128-101
30121-390
30128-668
30121-195
Art.-No. 80116-201
09 / 2004
30128-533
30121-023
51501-167
51708-043
30121-086
A
30127-011
APPENDIX A
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
51601-025
50610-009
51031-043
30128-671
51501-190
51501-191/-192
51603-000
51611-051
51501-167
261 / 266
ICC 350
Leiterplattenanordnung
40128-101
40128-110 (F)
260
/ 264
A
ANHANG A
Appendix
Abbreviations
Notes
Addresses
Abbreviations
The following list summarizes all those abbreviations and symbols which are used in this service manual.
Abbreviation means
NE neutral electrode
Abbreviation means
ö phase angle
| non-split NE
V(p) volts (peak value)
|| split NE
A(eff) amperes (r.m.s. value)
Parts lists
This service manual includes no parts lists. However, if you should need to refer to part numbers, please see
Appendix A.
Measuring equipment
For a list of recommended measuring equipment for servicing the units ICC 200, ICC 300 and ICC 350,
please refer to this service manual (Chapter 1, Test program 16).
Diagrams of electrical dimensions
The diagrams of the electrical dimensions are not shown in this service manual. However, you will find
these printed in the instruction manuals for the respective unit.
Art. No.: 80116-201
09 / 2004
Any questions?
This service manual has been put together carefully and was subjected to a continuous improvement process
during its creation by the Service Department and/or the Development Department at ERBE Elektromedizin.
Nevertheless, you may still have questions; additionally, this manual cannot assume to be perfect and
completely without error. In such cases, please contact:
Contents, formulation, structure, technical
information
Technical questions regarding service and the
units
Dipl.-Phys. Michael Grosse (Development Dept.)
Service Manager Roland Bauer (Service Dept.)
Tel.: (+49) 70 71 / 755–254
Tel.: (+49) 70 71 / 755–454
E-mail: mgrosse@erbe-med.de
E-mail: techservice@erbe-med.de
B
APPENDIX B
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
265/ 266